Home

Gefran SIEI AVyL Manual - International Lift Equipment

1. The RS 485 on the ARTDriveL series devices is located on the Regulation card in the form of a 9 pole SUB D socket connector XS The communication may be with or without galvanic isolation when using galvanic isolation an external power supply is necessary 5V Communication without galvanic isolation is suggested only in case of temporary connections for setup with one drive connected The differential signal is transferred via PIN 3 TxA RxA and PIN 7 TxB RxB Bus terminating resistors must be connected at the physical beginning and end of an RS 485 bus in order to prevent signal reflection The bus terminating resistors on ARTDriveL drives are connected via jumpers S5 and S6 This enables a direct point to point connection with a PLC or PC Nore Ensure that only the first and last drop of an RS 485 bus have a bus terminating resistor S5 and S6 mounted In all other cases within the line jumpers S5 and S6 must not be mounted With S40 and S41 mounted the drive supply the serial line This modality is allowed on point to point connection without galvanic isolation only ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 5 Serial Inreface Description 67 Nore A connection point to point can be done using PCI 485 option interface S40 and S41 mounted For multidrop connection two or more drive an external power supply is necessary pin 5
2. C xs T o o E XT j al i bp XT Co W 112 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12113 14 15 16 18 19 ZA FI e e ar 2 1 2223 2627 2829 356 57 38 394 142146178791 80 82 83 85 B eal da EE xs x seve E RS485 Table 4 3 1 1 LEDs amp Test points on Regulation Card Designation Color Function PWR green LED lit when the voltage 5V is present and at correct level RST red LED lit during the Hardware Reset PWM green LED lit during IGBT modulation RUN green LED is flashing when regulation is running not in STARTUP menu RS485 green LED lit when RS485 interface is supplied 5VE green LED lit when encoder power supply 5V XE 9 8VE red LED lit when encoder power supply 8V XE 2 XY4 test point Phase current signal U test point Reference point 40 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure ARTDrivel Instruction Manua Table 4 3 1 2 Jumpers and dip switches on Regulation Card RV33 Factory setting Factory use the setting must not be changed S5 S6 Terminating resistor for the serial interface RS485 ON ON Termination resistor IN OFF No termination resistor S8 Adaptation to the input signal of analog input 1 terminals 1 and 2 ONE 20 mA 4 20 mA po OFF 0 10 V 10 10 V Adaptation to the input signal of analog input 2 terminals 3 and 4 20 mA 4 p OFF 0 10 V 10 10 V Adaptation to th
3. teet ticker ED Roi 72 Chapter 7 Commissioning via Keypad essen 73 7 1 Commissioning for AVy AC AC4 Asychronous Motors 73 74 1 Field Oriented mode nnt 7 1 2 Sensorless vector mode 1 1 8 Control MODS 7 2 Commissioning for AVy BR BR4 Brushless Motors nnn 99 Chapter 8 Lift Sequencies Figure 8 1 Standard Commands Sequence Figute 0 2 Detail FIQUIG S 3 Detail StOP Nig Figure 8 4 Relation between Direction Commands and Contactor Control Signals 119 Chapter 9 Parameter 2 121 9 1 Parameter Legend eis 2 rie ce anaes 121 9 2 Parameter De SCriptlON rro ettet ere ee re e De es c vue 122 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting eese tnnt tnnt 206 Figure 10 1 Led Statusiand Keypad icti 206 List of Regulation Alarm EVents terri t n rei nf trece 207 Table 10 1 1 Regulation Alarm Events nids 208 10 2 List of Configuration and DataBase Error Alarm Events 210 10 2 1 Configuration Errors 210 10 2 2 Database Errors DB Errors 211 10 2 3 List of Error
4. Spd ref fbk res 0 03125 rpm Press to confirm the selection Press the drive will show Busy Please wait then SETUP MODE Drive data Set Motor nameplate parameters in Motor data menu values accepted e depend on drive size Set motor Qo parameters Motor data Rated voltage 330 00 V Press to edit rated motor voltage Press again to confirm the new value Rated current 35A Press Qo to edit rated motor current Press again to confirm YV ARTDriveL Instruction Manual le Chapter 7 Commissioning 101 Rated speed 2000 00 rpm Press to edit rated synchronous motor speed Press again to confirm the value Press to edit motor pole pairs Press again to confirm the value Torque Constant 2 480 Nm A Press to edit motor torque value Press again to confirm the value Nore If Torque Constant is not available it should be calculated with the following T P Where ETE P Rated power W UPS WI 1 Rated current 60 S Rated speed rpm Ta Where Rated torque Nm I Rated current A EMF constant 1 430 V s Press to edit motor back EMF constant from motor type plate Press to confirm Stator resist 0 135 ohm Press to edit motor stator resistance value Press to confirm LsS inductance 0 00237 H Press to edit motor stator value Press
5. Transition level from Medium to Low profile 1098 SLS H M tran bnd rpm RWS Calc 0 00 Calc Transition band from High to Medium profile 1099 SLS M L tran bnd rpm RWS 0 00 Calc Transition band from Medium to Low profile 1107 SLS 0 tran bnd rpm RWS 0 00 Calc Speed 0 transition band Motoring Regen Motoring 1111 Observer filter ms RWS 100 Calc Calc Time constant of the first order Filter on both gains profile REGULATION PARAM SIs SpdFbk gains Gain monitor 1085 Inuse S P gain R 0 00 000 000 PV In use Proportional gains of speed observer 1086 gain R 0 00 0 00 000 PV In use Integral gains of speed observer 1112 Observer ref mon R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PP Observer adapt gain reference monitor REGULATION PARAM Test generator The tuning of the regulators can be done using an internal test signal generator in order to evaluate the regulator response This operation requires the use of a digital oscilloscope The Test generator generates signal shaped as a rectangular wave with a programmable frequency and amplitude Using the Test generator function it is possible to carry out the manual tunings of Current regulator Flux regulator Voltage regulator and Speed regulator ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 157 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format
6. inp 4 src N A RWS 4000 List2 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default 6075 inp 5 src N A RWS 4000 List2 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default 6076 inp 6 src N A RWS 4000 List2 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default 6077 ConnectA inp 7 src N A RWS 4000 List2 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default CUSTOM FUNCTIONS Connect Connect B 6078 ConnectB inp 0 src N A RWS 4000 List1 PIN V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default 6079 inp 1 src N A RWS 1 4000 List 1 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default 6080 ConnectB inp 2 src N A RWS 1 4000 List 1 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default 6081 inp 3 src N A RWS 4000 List1 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 203 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 6082 ConnectB inp 4 src N A RWS 4000 List1 PIN V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default 6083 ConnectB inp 5 src N A RWS 4000 Listi PIN V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default 6084 ConnectB inp 6 src N A RWS 4000 List1 PIN V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default 6085 ConnectB inp 7 src N A RWS 4000 List1 PIN V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default SAVE PARAMETERS AVyL drive allows two different commands to save the parameters modified in the regulation mode selected by STARTUP menu Save Config command b
7. Syc LLL a Aouanbayy Suryoqims 8 OPT OAT nejop 5j A09 N O PD OPT DAI WNejop 2457 eANOP 0ET NIN juoumo jndjno payey Aouanbay 4j 8 1ndjno xepy I sse OAT 1 57 98A00p N TN O OAI 3jnegop 53 eA oez N ajndjno Ng 201 195 snonumuo Tsse o 9p OAT INdIMO 1913AU OPRaDE Chapter 2 Inspection procedures Components Identification and Std Specs ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 23 Table 2 3 4 2 A Overload Capability Sizes 1007 4370 2 Overload Continuous Overload EPOD Overload 1 Overload Overload pause time pause time Frequency Frequency Model fi r i ie a 5 D ode 400V factor time current eae 0 Cont curr 3Hz overload 3Hz overload 73 102 137 pas os i56 5 64 714 569 153 i46 73 9 4 6 5 6 4 8 TL2020 Overload Level CYCLEA Ti OvidCurrentLevel __100 ContinuousCurrentLevel aem 90 ContinuousCurrentLevel Time sec Overload Level CYCLE B OvidCurrentLevel 100 ContinuousCurrentLevel Time sec 1 Load current must be reduced to 90 level to allow next overload cycle 2 Drive current is limited to 100 level when drive overload alarm
8. Ww Mechanical data NV The drive will display from CurrReg 0 to CurrReg 100 after End Autotune blinking to show the end of procedure Press o 2 times to exit from the procedure SETUP MODE Autotune Switch off the output contactors and disconnect terminal 12 Enable Press o and wait few seconds Load setup Yes gt Ent No gt Esc Busy Please wait then Load setup Yes Ent gt Press o to exit from menu Startup config Load setup Scroll till Startup config Mechanical data Press to set Gearbox ratio Pulley diameter and Full scale speed of the system Travel unit sel Revolution Travel unit sel parameter determines all Speed and Ramp profile parameters units Revolution rpm rpm s and rpm s e Millimeters mm s mm s and mm s 104 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Ww Weights WY ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Press and to select the units press to confirm Gearbox ratio 35 00 de Press to set gearbox ratio of the system press to confirm Pulley diameter 500 mm ie Press and edit the pulley diameter of the system press to confirm Pulley diameter 0000500 mm to Full scale speed parameter Full scale speed 2000 rpm Press and edit the value of max speed in lift application set this
9. ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 159 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 4006 Spd 0 dis dly ms RWS 1000 16 10000 PP V F S B Delay time between the zero speed and the disabling procedure 1 0 CONFIG Commands Commands mon 150 Enable cmd mon N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B It displays the Enable command state 151 Start cmd mon N A R 0 0 1 DV It displays the Start command state 152 FastStop cmd mon N A R 0 0 1 DV It displays the FastStop command state 1 0 CONFIG Analog inputs Drive has 3 standard and 2 expanded analog inputs Each Al block has the following structure Analog inputs can also be used as non isolated digital inputs by using An inp X lt thr as output and setting appropriately parameter Anp inp X thr Al 1 sgn src Anino 1 lt thr inp 1 lt thr NULL SET BY Al 1 alt sel src Aninp 1 NULL AUTOTUNE An inp 1 offset An inp 1 type Ox INPUT An inp 1 scale Ani ki 1 thr y gt An ine output inp 1 An ine output i 1 AU im An inp 1 filter 1 P An inp 1 hi lim AELG 4 OO i e m amaa ar Sen nad aa ariaa a ee ds a a An inp 1 output SET BY An inp 1 lo lim o An inp 1 1 CALIBRATION AUTOTUNE 1 An inp 1 hi lim OF ANALOG INPUT HARDWARE JUMPER Off gt AI 10V 58 1 lo lim Input V 16384 10 V Gain Scale On g
10. Emergency COM DI AX 7X Dig Out 40 gt lt EZ E EA Run cont mon c fan gt lt lu cont mon L00 fom cont mon a o c t gt lt Door open mon Nores Phase sequence does not change This configuration must be used in FOC amp BRS modes Expansion board digital outputs must be enabled via software through menu 1 0 CONFIG Digital Outputs Exp dig out en In this example an expansion board is used but same functionality can be accomplished also using standard digital outputs 52 e Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Figure 4 6 3 Separate Output Contactors Management Emergency Dig Out Run cont mon gt lt Dig Out 1X Up cont mon Dig Out 2X Down cont mon Dig Out 3X Door open mon Notes Phase sequence changes according to direction selected This configuration can be used in VF amp SLS modes only Expansion board digital outputs must be enabled via software through menu CONFIG Digital Outputs Exp dig out en In this example an expansion board is used but same functionality can be accomplished also using standard digital outputs ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 53 4 7 Circuit Protection 4 7 1 External Fuses for the Power Section The inverter must be fused on the AC Input side Us
11. Has a direct function for the final user Placed on the market for distribution as a single functional unit or as units intended to be easily connected together EC Declaration of conformity required CE marking required for the system For the PDSs or CDM BDMs themselves see Validity Fields 1 or 2 The resulting EMC behaviour under specified conditions is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the system by using a modular or system approach as appropriate Note The manufacturer of the system is not responsible for the resulting behaviour of any installation which includes the PDS see Validity Field 3 Examples of application in the different Validity Fields 214 Chapter 11 EMC Directive Declaration of Conformity BDM to be used anywhere example in domestic premises or BDM available from commercial distributors sold without any knowledge of the purchaser or the application The manufacture is responsible that sufficient EMC can be achieved even by any unknown customer or layman snap CDM BDM or PDS for general purpose to be incorporated in a machine or for industrial application This is sold as a subassembly to a professional assembler who incorporates it in a machine system or installation Conditions of use are specified in the manufacturer s documentation Exchange of technical data allows optimization of the EMC solution See restricted distribution definition Installation It can consist of different com
12. ole CCELLLLELLELEEELELELCEELCEEECEEECEEECELECLEEE 76 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Switching freq 8 KHz Spd ref fbk res 0 250 rpm Press or o to select a speed resolution value based on max motor speed E g if rated speed is 1460 rpm set 0 125 rpm see table Speed resolution Max speed value Spd ref fbk res 0 125 rpm 2048 rpm 0 25 rpm 4096 rpm 0 5 rpm 8192 rpm 1 rpm 16384rpm 0 03125 rpm 512 rpm Spd ref fbk res 0 125 rpm Press to confirm the selection Press to exit from Drive data The drive will show Busy Please wait then SETUP MODE Drive data Nore If any changes have been made to Drive data menu parameters with this operation internal drive values will be calculated and autotune results will be initialized Chapter 7 Commissioning 77 Set Motor data CCLLLLLELLELEEELELELECEEECELEECEEECEEECCEEECEEE CEE Set Motor nameplate parameters in Motor data menu values accepted depend on drive size SETUP MODE Motor data Rated voltage 380 00 V to edit motor voltage To confirm the new value press Q to cancel edit press o t or scroll to Rated frequency 50 00 Hz to edit motor frequency to confirm the new value press Rated current 43 A le to edit motor cu
13. Asia GEFRAN SIEI ASIA Singapore Tel 65 6 8418 300 E mail info gefransiei com sg SIEI ASIA Shanghai Tel 86 21 6916 9898 E mail info sieiasia com cn USA SIEI AMERICA Charlotte NC 28208 Te 1 704 329 0200 SIEI A member of the GEFRAN Group GEFRAN S p A Via Sebina 74 25050 Provaglio d Iseo BS Italia Tel 39 030 9888 1 Fax 39 030 9839063 E mail info gefran com Internet www gefran com E mail salescontact sieiamerica com SIEI Customer Service E mail customer siei it Tel 39 02 967 60 500 Fax 39 02 967 60 278 Manuale AVy_L AC BR 3 5 HGB 0 2 22 5 2006 1S9H16
14. 2 J 540 MRUTS0007R s 77 22 5550 MRUTS0007R 8 77 22 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual TADL0250 Parameters description Nominal power of the braking resistor R Braking resistor value Er Max surge energy which can be dissipated by the resistor Pon Peak power applied to the braking resistor T Maximum braking time in condition of limit operating cycle braking power P with typical triangular profile 2 s Poor Figure 4 9 2 2 Limit Operating Braking Cycle with Typical Triangular Power Profile n P Poor Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 59 Minimum cycle time in condition of limit operating cycle braking power with typical triangular profile 1 Po z Ter 5 2 The BU overload alarm occurs if the duty cycle exceeds the maximum data allowed in order to prevent possible damage to the resistor Resistor model Standard resistor data Example code MRI T900 68R MRI resistor type 900 nominal power 900 W T with safety thermostat 68R resistor value 68 ohm Note The suggested match of resistor model and inverter size allows a braking stop at nominal torque with duty cycle T T 20 Where T Braking time Cycle time Figure 4 9 2 3 Braking Cycle with T T 20 Pn 1 Tir GN The standard resistor be used for couplings different from the ones above reported These
15. 4000 Listi V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 2 signal selected to the Word 1 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 9343 Word src N A RWS 4000 List1 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 3 signal selected to the Word 1 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 9344 Word1 src N A RWS 4000 List1 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 4 signal selected to the Word 1 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 9345 Word1 B5 src N A RWS 4000 Listi V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 5 signal selected to the Word 1 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 9346 Word1 src N A RWS 4000 Listi V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 5 signal selected to the Word 1 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 9347 Word1 B7 src N A RWS 4000 Listi V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 7 signal selected to the Word 1 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 9348 Word1 B8 src N A RWS 4000 List1 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 8 signal selected to the Word 1 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 9349 Word1 B9 src N A RWS 4000 List1 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 9 signal selected to the Word 1 refer to sig
16. PV V F S B Internal Synchronous Word 3 value configuration default connected to Drv DGFC S W3src 4109 Int DrvDGFC S W4 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Internal Synchronous Word 4 value configuration default connected to Drv DGFC S W4src APPL CARD CONFIG DGFC Drv gt DGFCS W mon 4110 Drv DGFC S W mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Synchronous Word 0 monitor from Drive to DGFC 4111 Drv DGFC S Wimon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Synchronous Word 1 monitor from Drive to DGFC 4112 DGFC S W2mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Synchronous Word 2 monitor from Drive to DGFC 4113 DGFC S W3mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Synchronous Word 3 monitor from Drive to DGFC 4114 Drv DGFC S W4mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Synchronous Word 4 monitor from Drive to DGFC APPL CARD CONFIG DGFC DGFCS gt Drv W mon 4120 DGFC S Drv W mon N A R 0 00 PV V F S B Synchronous Word 0 monitor from DGFC to Drive 4121 DGFC S Drv Wimon N A R 0 00 PV V F S B Synchronous Word 1 monitor from DGFC to Drive 4122 DGFC S Drv W2mon N A R 0 00 PV V F S B Synchronous Word 2 monitor from DGFC to Drive 4123 DGFC S Drv W3mon N A R 0 00 PV V F S B Synchronous Word 3 monitor from DGFC to Drive 4124 DGFC S Drv W4mon N A R 0 00 PV V F S B Synchronous Word 4 monitor from DGFC to Drive APPL CARD CONFIG DGFC DGFC async Ch APPL CARD CONFIG DGFC Drv gt DGF
17. 15 C 158 59 F 20 Chapter 2 Inspection procedures Components Identification and Std Specs ARTDrivel Instruction Manual DISPOSAL OF THE DEVICE The AVy Drive can be disposed as electronic scrap in accordance with the currently valid national regulations for the disposal of electronic parts The plastic covers of the Drives up to size 3150 are recyclable the material used is gt ABS PC lt 2 3 2 AC Input Output Connection The AVy Drive must be connected to an AC mains supply capable of delivering asymmetrical short circuit current at 480V 10 Vmax lower or equal to the values indicated on table 2 3 4 1 For the use of an AC input choke see chapter 4 8 1 No external connection of the regulator power supply to the existing AC Input supply is required since the power supply is taken from the DC Link circuit When commissioning set the Mains voltage parameter to the value of the AC Input voltage concerned This automatically sets the threshold for the Undervoltage alarm at the appropriate level Note In some cases AC Input chokes and possibly noise suppression filters should be fitted on the AC Input side of the device See chapter Chokes Filters Adjustable Frequency Drives and AC Input filters have ground discharge currents greater then 3 5 mA EN 50178 specifies that with discharge currents greater than 3 5 mA the protective conductor ground connection PE1 must be fixed type 2 3 3 AC Input The Input cur
18. OK Scroll till Startup config Mechanical data Mechanical data Press to set Gearbox ratio Pulley diameter and Full scale speed of the system Travel unit sel Revolution Travel unit sel parameter determines all Speed and Ramp profile parameters units Revolution rpm rpm s and rpm s e Millimeters mm s mm s and mm s Gearbox ratio 35 00 de Press and set gearbox ratio of the system press to confirm Pulley diameter 500 mm de i de Press and set pulley diameter of the system press to confirm Full scale speed 1460 rpm Press to edit max speed in lift application set this parameter to rated motor speed press to confirm Nore It defines the 100 of the application speed referenced The absolute speed handling range is 200 Full scale speed Press o to exit from Mechanical data menu Bus Please wait then Startup config Mechanical data 82 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Kennnnnnnnnn e Encoder type configuration Encoder config Feedback from encoder connected to XE connector on Regulation card For encoder type configuration go to step Feedback from encoder connected to XE connector on Regulation card or Feedback from encoder connected to XFI connector on EXP optional card LLELLELLELLEL Now go to step Q up to step Gor chapter
19. PP V F S B Word 5 monitor of the PDC channel on the Drive output COMMUNICATION SBI gt Drv word COMMUNICATION SBI gt Drv word SBI gt Drv W mon 9000 SBI WO mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Word 0 monitor of the PDC channel on the Drive input 9001 SBI Drv W1 mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Word 1 monitor of the PDC channel on the Drive input 9002 SBI Drv W2 mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Word 2 monitor of the PDC channel on the Drive input 9003 SBI Drv W3 mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Word 3 monitor of the PDC channel on the Drive input 9004 SBI Drv W4 mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Word 4 monitor of the PDC channel on the Drive input 9005 SBI W5 mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Word 5 monitor of the PDC channel on the Drive input SAVE PARAMETERS AVyL drive allows two different commands to save the parameters modified in the regulation mode selected by STARTUP menu Save Config command by all other menus SAVE PARAMETERS command Any changes made in STARTUP menu require Save Config command which saves all entire regulation mode selected It is recommended every time the user made any changes into STARTUP menu SAVE PARAMETERS command saves all the changes made out of STARTUP menu only When on the keypad display appears blinking message Use Save Config use Save Config command ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 193 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min M
20. 55 C 4 131 F for devices with keypad transport 25 70 C 13 158 F class 2K3 as per EN50178 20 60 C 4 140 F for devices with keypad Air humidity operation 5 to 85 1 g m to 25 g m without moisture condensation or icing Class 3K3 as per EN50178 Storage 5 to 95 1 g m to 29 g m Class 1K3 as per EN50178 transport 95 3 60 g m 2 Air pressure operation kPa 86 to 106 class 3K3 as per EN50178 storage kPa 86 to 106 class 1K4 as per EN50178 transport kPa 70 to 106 class 2K3 as per EN50178 STANDARD Climatic conditions IEC 68 2 Part 2 and 3 Clearance and creepage EN 50178 UL508C UL840 degree of pollution 2 Vibration IEC68 2 Part 6 EMC compatibility EN61800 3 see EMC Guidelines instruction book Approvals CE UL cUL 1 Parameter Ambient temp 40 C 104 Ambient temp 0 40 32 104 F Over 40 C current reduction of 2 of rated output current per remove front plate better than class 3K3 as per EN50178 2 Parameter Ambient temp 50 C 122 F Ambient temp 0 50 C 32 122 F Current derated to 0 8 rated output current Over 40 C 104 removal of the top cover better than class 3K3 as per EN50178 3 Greatest relative air humidity occurs with the temperature 40 C 104 F or if the temperature of the device is brought suddenly from 25 30 13 86 F 4 Greatest absolute air humidity if the device is brought suddenly from 70
21. An out 1 hi lim in counts 10 V An out 1 mon in counts An out 1 scale An out 1 lo lim in counts 10 V Software version 3 200 An out 1 hi lim 16383 cnt An out 1 lo lim 16384 cnt L o An out 1 src NULL X gt Analog Output 1 o An out 1 mon An out 1 scale 1 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 165 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode Software version 3 300 An out 1 mon 1X em An out 1 sgn sre NULL Drive has 2 standard voltage outputs and 4 expanded analog outputs 1x and 2x volatge outputs 3x and 4x current outputs Each Analog output block has the following structure Analog outputs Std analog outs Analog output 1 An out 1 src 3570 An out 1 src N A RWS 4000 List 2 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the selected signal to the Analog output 1 refer to signals List 2 of Pick List manual 3575 An out 1 sgn src N A RWS 4000 List 2 V F S B It allows to select the sign of the signal connected on analog output from software rel 3 300 Analog outputs Std analog outs Analog output 1 An out 1 cfg 6012 An out 1 scale N A RWS 1 10 10 PP V F S B Scale or multiplicative factor of Analog output 1 6010 An out 1 hi lim cnt RWS 16383 0 32767 V F S B Analog output 1 count value aimed at obtaining 10V
22. DB access lt gt An attempt to access the database at the speficied index occurred during autotune procedure No break point Failure in measuring inverter voltage distortion Rs high lim Failure in measuring motor stator Resistance Rs low lim Failure in measuring motor stator Resistance DTL high lim Failure in computing compensation for the inverter voltage distortion DTL low lim Failure in computing compensation for the inverter voltage distortion DTS high lim Failure in computing compensation for the inverter voltage distortion DTS low lim Failure in computing compensation for the inverter voltage distortion LsS high lim Failure in calculating motor leakage inductance LsS low lim Failure in calculating motor leakage inductance ImNom not found Identification of rated magnetizing current failed ImNom not found Identification of maximum magnetizing current failed RrV low lim Voltage limit exceeded during measurement for the calculation of motor rotor resistance RrV high lim Voltage limit exceeded during measurement for the calculation of motor rotor resistance Rr high lim Failure in calculating motor rotor resistance Rr low lim Failure in calculating motor rotor resistance Al too high Value of analog input is too high for full scale autocalibration Al too low Value of analog input is too low for full scale autocalibration Rr2 high lim Failure in calculati
23. Drive dimensions mm inch 1055 1 mm inch 306 5 12 0 mm inch 199 5 7 8 mm inch 62 2 4 mm inch 807 mm inch 296 5 11 mm inch 807 mm inch 299 5 11 mm inch TED mm inch 284 11 mm inch ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 3 Installation Guidelines 29 Figure 3 1 4 Mounting Methods Sizes 4220 81600 ua D4 Mounting wall D x mma 2569 o mee uu we pe c I 1 097 1L 5L ETT MM m us us ss 749 us 3 9 a6 1767 es 293 tadl3105 Figure 3 1 5 Keypad Positioning 99939253 88888 7 4 Le L To allow a confortable viewing angle the keypad can be oriented on three different positions 30 Chapter 3 Installation Guidelines ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 3 2 Watts Loss Heat Dissipation Internal Fans and Minimum Cabinet Opening Suggested for the Cooling The heat dissipation of the Drives depends on the operating state of the connected motor The table below shows values that refer to operation at default switching frequency see section 2 3 2 AC Input Output Connection Tamb lt 40 C typ motor power factor and nominal continuous current Table 3 2 1 Heat Dissipation and Required Air Flow Airflow of fan m h
24. OV and pin 9 5V Pins and 8 are reserved for use with the PCI 485 interface card When connecting the serial interface ensure that only shielded cables are used power cables and control cables for contactors relays are routed separately The communication protocol can be chosen between Slink4 Modbus Jbus ISO 1745 or Hiperface through Protocol type parameter COMMUNICATION RS 485 Protocol type 5 1 RS 485 Serial Interface Connector Description Table 5 1 1 Assignment of the Plug XS Connector for the RS 485 Serial Interface _ intermaluse o PIN2 mtermalue PINA Internal use PIN 5 OV Ground for 5 V Power supply PIN 6 Internal use EE RS 485 Power supply ai4110 68 Chapter 5 Serial Interface Description ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 6 Keypad Operation The keypad is made of a LCD display with two 16 digit lines seven LEDs and nine function keys It is used to start and stop the drive this function can be disabled to display the speed voltage diagnostics etc during the operation set parameters and enter commands The LED module is made of 6 LEDs It is used to display status and diagnostic information during the operation Keypad and LED module can be installed or removed also while the drive is running Torque Torque Alarm Enable ZeroSpeed Limit Torque Torque Alarm Enable ZeroSpeed Limit Jog Torque
25. 1 the condition is true 5021 An inp 2 offset cnt RWS 0 16384 16383 PP V F S B Analog Input 2 offset count value displaying 5025 Aninp2 gain N A RWS 1 16 16 PP V F S B Analog Input 2 gain count value displaying Analog inputs Std analog inps Analog input 3 An inp 3 sre 5051 sgn src N A RWS 4000 List3 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It connects the selected signal to the selector of the multiplier input if the signal is 0 multiply by 1 or if the signal is 1 multiply by 1 The multiplier allows to invert Analog Input 3 signal refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual 5052 Al 3 alt sel src N A RWS 4000 List3 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default 162 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode It connects the selected signal to the selector of the alternative reference for An Inp 3 block refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual Analog inputs Std analog inps Analog input 3 An inp 3 cfg 5040 An inp 3 type N A RWS 0 0 2 DP V F S B 0 10V 10V i 0 20mA 0 10V 2 4 20mA For An inp 3 type description refer to An inp 1 type description above 5042 AI3 alt value cnt RWS 0 32767 32767 PV V F S B Alternative reference value in count for Analog input 3 5043 Aninp3thr cnt RWS 3277 16384 16383 V F S B Analog Input 3 threshold value in count 5044 Aninp3 scale N
26. 1 65 Braking resistor optional A Intermediate circuit connection output Braking unit resistor command braking resistor BRI must be connected between and C QHuyn AC line volt 3Ph var Motor connection 1 36 output current Q wars gir owenseiemen __ Emergency module signal required to interface the drive 022A Note with the EMS device Emergency Module Supplier i OH EM Boney Modis Supplier EM and FEXT terminals are available on sizes FEXT lac Logic fan control signal repeated on an external fan 250Vac AVy2040AC4 BR4 up to rexr 1 AVy5550AC4 4 only PELAG Grounding protective earth conductor ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Fans will be always start when the drive is enabled Fans will stop when the drive is disabled after a period of 300 sec and heatsink temperature is below 60 C Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 37 Power terminals lay out sizes 1007 to 3150 The terminals of the devices are made accessible by removing the cover and the cable entry plate see section 4 1 Accessing the connectors on some drive types it is also possible to extract the removable connector All the power terminals are located on the power card PV33 Power terminals lay out sizes 4185 to 81600 The terminals of the devices are made accessible by removing the cover see section 4 1 Accessing the connectors Maximum cable sizes for power terminals U1 V1 W1 U
27. Analog output 2 count value displaying Analog outputs Exp analog outs Analog output 1X An out 1X src 4090 An out 1X src N A RWS 4000 List 2 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the selected signal to the Analog output 1X refer to signals List 2 of Pick List manual Analog outputs Exp analog outs Analog output 1X An out 1X cfg 6022 An out 1X scale N A RWS 1 10 10 PP V F S B Scale or multiplicative factor of Analog output 1X 6020 An out 1X hi lim cnt RWS 16383 0 32767 PP V F S B Analog output 1X count value aimed at obtaining 10V Value must be higher than zero 6021 An out 1X lo lim cnt RWS 16384 32768 0 PP V F S B Analog output 1X count value aimed at obtaining 10V Value must be higher than zero Analog outputs Exp analog outs Analog output 1X An out 1X mon 6023 An out 1X mon cnt R 0 00 32768 32676 PP V F S B Analog output 1X count value displaying Analog outputs Exp analog outs Analog output 2X An out 2X src 4091 An out 2X src N A RWS 4000 List 2 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the selected signal to the Analog output 2X refer to signals List 2 of Pick List manual Analog outputs Exp analog outs Analog output 2X An out 2X cfg 6027 An out 2X scale N A RWS 1 10 10 PP V F S B Scale or multiplicative factor of Analog output 2X 6025 An out 2X hi lim cnt RWS 16383 0 32767 PP V F S B Analog o
28. BU OL accum 96 p 123 BU overload p 188 BU protection p 136 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual BU res cont pwr p 136 BU res OL factor p 136 BU res OL time p 136 BU resistance p 136 BUOL activity p 188 C Cabin weight p 129 Calc Inertia p 135 Calc method p 134 CCF activity p 187 CCF restart p 187 CCF restart time p 187 Cmp 1 delay p 200 Cmp 1 function p 200 Cmp 1 inp 0 p 199 1 inp 0 src p 199 Cmp 1 inp 1 p 200 1 inp 1 src p 199 Cmp 1 inp 2 p 200 1 inp 2 src p 199 Cmp 1 inversion p 200 Cmp 1 window p 200 Cmp 2 delay p 201 Cmp 2 function p 201 Cmp 2 inp 0 p 201 2 inp 0 src p 200 Cmp 2 inp 1 p 201 2 inp 1 src p 200 Cmp 2 inp 2 p 201 2 inp 2 src p 200 Cmp 2 inversion p 201 Cmp 2 window p 201 CNT activity p 186 CNT feedback src p 185 CNT hold off p 186 Comm card fault p 187 Commands p 159 Commands cfg p 159 Commands mon p 160 Commands select p 159 Commands src p 159 COMMUNICATION p 191 Compare 1 p 199 Compare 1 cfg p 199 Compare 1 mon p 200 Compare 1 output p 200 Compare 1 src p 199 Compare 2 p 200 Compare 2 cfg p 201 Compare 2 mon p 201 Compare 2 output p 201 Compare 2 src p 200 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Complete rot p 128 Complete still p 128 Connect p 203 Connect A p 203 Connect B p 203 ConnectA inp 0 src p 203 ConnectA inp 1 src p 203 ConnectA inp 2 src p 203 ConnectA inp 3 src p 203 ConnectA inp 4 src p 203 ConnectA inp 5 src p 203 ConnectA
29. DO 0 inversion p 174 DO 0 src p 173 DO 0X inversion p 175 DO 0X src p 174 DO 1 inversion p 174 DO 1 src p 174 DO 1X inversion p 175 DO 1X src p 174 DO 2 inversion p 174 DO 2 src p 174 DO 2X inversion p 175 DO 2X src p 174 DO 3 inversion p 174 DO 3 src p 174 DO 3210 p 122 DO 3X inversion p 175 DO 3X src p 174 DO 4X inversion p 175 DO 4X src p 175 DO 5X inversion p 175 DO 5X src p 175 DO 6X inversion p 175 DO 6X src p 175 DO 7X inversion p 175 DO 7X src p 175 DOL activity p 188 Door activity p 187 Door fbk src p 187 Door feedback p 187 Door hold off p 187 Door open speed p 141 Door open src p 141 DOX 76543210 p 122 175 Drive cont curr p 124 Drive data p 126 Drive ID Status p 124 Drive name p 125 Drive overload p 188 Drive size p 124 Drive type p 124 Drv DGFC A WOmon p 197 Drv DGFC A WOsrc p 195 Drv DGFC A Wimon p 197 Drv DGFC A Wisre p 195 Drv DGFC A W2mon p 197 Drv DGFC A W2src p 195 Drv DGFC A W3mon p 197 Drv DGFC A W3src p 195 Drv DGFC A W4mon p 197 Drv DGFC A W4src p 196 Drv DGFC A W5mon p 197 Drv DGFC A W5src p 196 Drv DGFC A W6mon p 197 Drv DGFC A W6src p 196 Drv DGFC A W7mon p 197 Drv DGFC A W7src p 196 Drv DGFC A W8mon p 197 Drv DGFC A W8src p 196 Drv DGFC A W9mon p 197 Drv DGFC A W9src p 196 Drv DGFC S WOmon p 195 Drv DGFC S WOsrc p 194 Drv DGFC S Wimon p 195 Drv DGFC S W1src p 194 Drv DGFC S W2mon p 195 Drv DGFC S W2s
30. In case an alarm occurs this led is lighed up with an intermittent red colour H 3 See following steps to view alarm and reset it Alam R 5 MONITOR Alarm list ae Spd fbk Loss If still active If not active the enty is deleted from the list Q Q Sequencer is reset by using the 0 key Alarm list lt no alarm gt 1 Press Shift Alarm The Alarm list will be displayed 2 Press Enter one or more times untill Sequencer message appears to acknowledge the alarms Nore Tf the alarm is still active red LED will blink again If it not active red LED will stop 3 Press O key to reset the Sequencer The Alarm List shows all the occurred alarms both if they are due to protections and to errors when limit values are exceeded In order to disappear from the alarm list alarm have to be acknowledged The acknowledgement is possible only if the alarm is no longer active The alarms are automatically acknowledged after two minutes Nore Pressing Enter will acknowledge the alarm Acknowledging the alarm 206 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting ARTDrivel Instruction Manual will only remove it from the active alarm list If the alarm condition also resulted in a drive trip the sequence will also need to be reset This can be done by pressing the key The drive cannot be re enabled or started after a trip condition unless the drive sequencer is reset
31. Profile Generator LZ speed ref connected to Speed ref 1 src Position Profile Generation STARTUP Startup config Encoders config 1940 Speed fbk sel N A RW 0 0 1 DV V F B 0 Std encoder 1 Exp encoder It allows to switch the feedback between the encoder standard port XE on RV33 regulation card and the encoder expanded from encoder optional cards EXP F2E and EXP D14A4F Nore Expansion encoder cannot be used for speed feedback in Brushless mode It can be used only for setting speed reference 1925 Std enc type N A RWZ 12 DK V F B Encoder type connected to the standard input Default 1 for AVy AC AC4 4 for AVy BR BR4 Set allowed for AVy AC AC4 0 Sinusoidal sinusoidal encoder select the correct jumper settings on the reg card RV33 1 Digital digital encoder 2 Frequency input digital single channel frequency input channel A Signal 5V must be connected between A and power supply common Set allowed for AVy BR BR4 3 Sinusoidal Hall sinusoidal incremental encoder with A A B B C C traces and three digital Hall sensor absolute position traces for initial synchronisation factory setting 4 Sinusoidal SinCos sinusoidal incremental encoder with A A B B C C traces and two Sin Cos absolute position traces for initial synchronisation 5 Sinusoidal Extern sinusoidal incremental encoder with A A B B traces and ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9
32. Sequencer Disable drive No No No 45 25 Alarm event caused drive disable Door fbk fail Disable drive Yes No No 46 26 It trips when the door feedback signal is not detected Overspeed No Yes No No 47 27 Maximum speed threshold was exceeded while drive in RUN state UV repetitive Disable drive No No No 48 28 If n of faults is set to max the Alarm is disabled More than a programmable number of UV fault were detected in 5 minutes IOC repetitive Disable drive No No No 49 29 More than 2 OC faults were detected in 30 sec IGBTdesat repet Disable drive No No No 50 30 More than 2 IGBT desat faults were detected in 30 sec WatchDog user Disable drive No No No 51 31 The drive failed to retrigger the communication watchdog within the specified time Hw fail Disable drive No No No 52 32 Communication failure between Drive Regulation board and one of its options or I O expansions ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 10 Troubleshooting 209 10 2 List of Configuration and DataBase Error Alarm Events Entering bad data or conflicting data into the drive configuration will cause user errors to be displayed These type of errors can be Configuration errors Database errors DB errors Refer to the following paragraphs for descriptions Drive size setting Note If the User changes the Drive size the drive will display Drv size new size old size For example Drive size 0 1 10 2 1 Configuration Errors Configuration errors can
33. Table 4 7 1 1 External Fuse Types for AC Input Side 54 4 7 2 External Fuses for the Power Section DC Input Side c ccccssssesessssescssssesssssssscsessssssssssescstsssscesseeees 55 Table 4 7 2 1 External Fuses Type for DC Input Side i 47 3 Internal FUses erre nein rece pr cde e ease B a uenis Table 4 7 3 1 Internal FuSas i RARE sisi 4 8 Ghokes Bilters tn ret ite cin D HERE CHR HERE RH aie diners 4 9 T AC Input ClOKeS roten rab naro E thats Re E E hehe Table 4 8 1 1 3 Phase AC Input Chokes m 41 82 DUtDUE CNOKGS S R Table 4 8 2 1 Recommended Output CHOKES sss 4 8 3 Interference Suppression Filters as 4 9 Braking Units rc he nannies Figure 4 9 1 Operation with Braking Unit Principle sss 4 91 Interral Braking Unit sen Reni EUER ett EISE EIE 4 Table of Contents ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Figure 4 9 1 1 Connection with Internal Braking Unit and External Braking Resistor 58 4 9 2 External Braking ResiStM Table 4 9 2 1 Lists and Technical Data of the External Standard Resistors P Figure
34. The drive State Machine controls the drive running and starting accounting for protection amp alarming command sequence and reset status The table below displays various operation states by Sequencer status number Sequencer status Magnetization running S Magnetization completed Stop Fast stop Start No alarm drive is ready to accept all commands 4 Faststop Stop 0 Magnetization running and Start command already present _ jAlmativ 16 Alarm not active waiting for reset TAV3i020 1 2 3 4 5 10 12 16 To read the sequencer status of the State Machine go to menu R S MONITOR Output voltage 0v o 3 times to MONITOR Advanced status DC link voltage 580 V 3 times to Sequencer status 12 10 1 List of Regulation Alarm Events Table 10 1 1 provides a description of regulation alarm events and information on how to configure the intended drive behaviour on their occurrence where applicable ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 10 Troubleshooting 207 Table 10 1 1 Regulation Alarm Events o 2 o Es gt o e 2 o E 22 S amp o E 5 8 Ss lt PEE 0 gt 0 7 S 6 t or o o 2 amp as os na Failure supply Disable drive No No NA 21 1 One or more of the power supply circuits in the control section failed Undervoltage Disable drive No Yes Yes 22 2 Logic is bas
35. Yes Appl card fut w w wf vs vs Drive overload m w wf vss Motor overload 20 4 Prog vw vwe Jh Yes Yes Yes BU overload zat Poo w v w Data lost n u isme w w w Brake fbk fail 2 43 Prog vt JM Yes Yes Yes Ye Sequencer 45 Dis drive vw Jh Yes Yes No Door fb fail Poo w Mes yd 7 a om we UV repetitive 28 48 Dis drive vt Yes Yes Yes 10 repetitive w w vss IGBTdesat repet 30 50 Discrve do m Ys Yes Yes WatchDog user 31 51 Dis drive vw Jh Yes Yes Yes Hw fail 32 52 Dis drive vw Yes Yes Yes Alarms status 190 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode COMMUNICATION The access to COMMUNICATION menu is allowed by Level 1 password 12345 It must be set in the SERVICE menu RS485 The communication protocol can be chosen between Slink4 Modbus Jbus or ISO 1745 through the Protocol type parameter Each of these protocols allow a multipoint network See the specific protocol manual for further details The Drive address can be defined via the Slave address parameter Editing parameter 105 Slave address and saving the new value perform the address chan
36. about the voltages and the motor power Which properties of the asynchronous motors have an unfavorable result in operation with frequency inverters Motors with double squirrel cage rotors or deep rotor bars should not be used Star or delta connection Motors can be connected in both star or delta connections Experience has shown that star connected motors have better control properties so star connections are preferred Cooling The cooling of three phase motors is normally implemented by means of a fan that is mounted on the motor shaft Remember that the air flux produced by the fan is reduced when the motor is running at lower speeds which in certain circumstances may mean that the cooling is insufficient for the motor Check with the motor manufacturer whether an external fan is required and the motor speed range in the application concerned Operation above the rated speed Due to the mechanical factors involved bearings unbalance of rotor and due to the increased iron losses consult the manufacturer of the motor if this is operated above the rated speed What motor data is required for connecting the frequency inverter Motor nameplate specifications Asynchronous induction motor Rated voltage Rated power Rated frequency Cosphi Rated current Efficiency Rated speed ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 1 Functions and General Features 15 Note Note Synchronous brushless motor Rated v
37. of the Unrestricted Distribution class Validity Field Description Placed on the market as a single commercial unit for distribution and final use 1 Free movement based on compliance with the EMC Directive Finished Product Complex EC Declaration of conformity required CE marking required component PDS or CDM BDM should comply with IEC 1800 3 EN 61800 3 The manufacturer of the PDS or CDM BDM is responsible for the EMC behaviour of the PDS or CDM BDM under specified conditions EMC measures outside the item are described in an easy to understand fashion and could actually be implemented by a layman in the field of EMC The EMC responsibility of the assembler of the final product is to follow the manufacturer s recommenda tions and guidelines Note The manufacturer of the PDS or CDM BDM is not responsible for the resulting behaviour of any system or installation which includes the PDS see Validity Fields 3 or 4 2 Finished Product Complex component only for professional assemblers Clauses 3 7 6 2 1 6 2 3 2 amp 6 3 2 A PDS or CDM BDM of the Restricted Distribution class sold to be included as part of a system or installation Relates to PDS or CDM or BDM directly Not placed on the marked as a single commercial unit for distribution and final use Intended only for professional assemblers who have a level of technical competence to correctly install No EC Declaration of conformity No CE marking P
38. s dans des installations industriels Une partie des drives sont sous ten sion pendant Il operation L installation lectrique et l ouverture des drives devrait tre execut uniquement par du personel qualifi De mauvaises installations de moteurs ou de drives peuvent provoquer des dommages materiels ou blesser des personnes On doit suivir les instructions donne s dans ce manuel et observer les r gles nationales de s curit Always connect the Drive to the protective ground PE via the marked connection terminals PE2 and the housing PE1 AC Input filters have ground discharge currents greater than 3 5 mA EN 50178 speci fies that with discharge currents greater than 3 5 mA the protective conductor ground connection PE1 must be fixed type and doubled for redundancy Il faut toujours connecter le variateur la terre PE par les des bornes PE2 et le ch ssis PEI Le courant de dispersion vers la terre est sup rieur 3 5 mA sur les filtres courant altern CA Les normes EN 50178 sp cifient qu en cas de courant de dispersion vers la terre sup rieur a 3 5 ma la mise a la terre PE1 doit avoir une double connexion pour la redondance 8 Chapter O Safety Precautions ARTDrivel Instruction Manua The drive may cause accidental motion in the event of a failure even if it is disabled unless it has been disconnected from the AC input feeder En cas de panne le variateur peut causer une mise en marche ac
39. the units in this menu change as follows rpm becomes mm s rpm s becomes mm s rpm s becomes mms Two different sets of ramp profiles MRO and MR1 are available the selection is done by parameter ramp sel src 8090 into TRAVEL Lift sequence menu Default is MRO Multispeed Speed ref MRO acceleration MRO acc ini jerk lt MRO acc end jerk Acceleration Multispeed Speed ref sia Multispeed Acceleration MRO dec end jerk MIRO deceleration MRO dec ini jerk gt f N end decel 8046 acc ini jerk rpm s RWS 1000 0 349 750 100 PP V F S B Acceleration initial jerk set 0 8040 acceleration rpm s RWS 500 1 1 5 106 PP V F S B Acceleration ramp set 0 8041 MRO acc end jerk rpm s RWS 1000 0 349 750 106 PP V F S B Acceleration end jerk set 0 8047 MRO dec ini jerk rpm s RWS 1000 0 349 750 106 PP V F S B Deceleration initial jerk set 0 8042 deceleration rpm s RWS 500 1 1 5 106 PP V F S B Deceleration ramp set 0 8043 dec end jerk rpm s RWS 1000 0 349 750 106 PP V F S B Deceleration end jerk set 0 8044 MRO end decel rpm s RWS 1000 1 1 5 106 PP V F S B Final deceleration slope corresponding to removal of START command 8056 MR acc ini jerk rpm s RWS 1000 0 349 750 106 PP V F S B Acceleration initial jerk set 1 8050 1 acceleration rpm s RWS 500 1 1 5 106 PP V F S B Acceleration
40. to confirm Nx 102 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual V Autotune Ww ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Nore If costant Stator resistance and LsSinductance values are unknowed set them to zero before running current self tuning procedure Press to exit from Motor data for few seconds the drive will show Busy Please wait then SETUP MODE Motor data Nore If any changes have been made to Motor data menu parameters with this operation internal drive values will be calculated and autotune results will be initialized If the operation generates any error messages or alarm led comes on please check consistency of motor parameters and try again or see specific directions in section 10 Troubleshooting Scroll o to perform Current Regulator Autotune procedure This operation may cause limited shaft rotation Warning SETUP MODE Autotune CurrReg Start Connect terminal 12 Enable to terminal 19 24VDC through relays or local switch then switch on the output contactors It is suggested to open the brake the rope must be removed if not possible leave the brake closed CurrReg Press I Key Press e to start the Autotune procedure Nore Autotune procedure can take different minutes to be completed Autotune can be aborted at any time by pressing Q9 Chapter 7 Commissioning 103 Ww Load setup
41. 0 00 DV V F S B Sequencer status of drive State Machine It controls the drive running and starting accounting for protection amp alarming command sequence and reset status ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 123 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode State Sequencer status 1 Magnetization running 2 Magnetization completed Stop 3 Start 4 Fast stop Stop 5 Fast stop Start 9 No alarm drive is ready to accept all commands 10 Magnetization running and Start command already present 12 Alarm active 16 Alarm not active waiting for reset 3230 CPUT runtime R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV V F S B Time needed by the CPU1 microprocessor 3240 CPU2 runtime R 0 00 0 00 000 PP V F S B Time needed by the CPU2 microprocessor MONITOR Drive ID Status 1460 Drive cont curr A RW CALC 0 00 0 00 V F S B Drive maximum continuos current rating its default value depends by the drive size and applicable derating factors 114 Drive size N A R D Size 0 20 DK V F S B Drive size rating in kW ULN 400VAC IEC 146 Class 1 of Hp ULN 460VAC IEC 146 Class 2 0 0 75 kW 0 75 Hp 1 1 5 kW 1 5 Hp 2 2 2 KW 2 0 Hp 3 3 0 kW 3 0 Hp 4 4 0 kW 5 0 Hp 5 5 5 KW 7 5 Hp 6 7 5 kW 10 Hp 7 11 kW 15 Hp 8 15 kW 20 Hp 9 22 kW 25 Hp 10 30 kW 30 Hp 11 37 kW 40 Hp 12 45 kW 50 Hp 13 55 kW 60 Hp 14 75 kW 75 Hp 15 90 kW 100 Hp 16 110 kW 125 Hp 17 132 kW 150 Hp
42. 1 active State of DC Brake functon Nore Sequence available only when IPA 7105 set as Start fwd rev Lift DC brake mon signal that controls DC current braking is not available Speed ref 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 eo o a 3 3 duration DC brake current DC brake state n A DC brake delay DC brake duration gt Spd 0 ref dly Brake close B DC brake delay DC brake duration lt Spd 0 ref dly Brake close 148 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min TRAVEL Ramp function Max Format Reg Mode 8031 Ramp out enable N A WSZ 1 0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Ramp function enabling DP V F S B 8021 Ramp shape N A RWS 1 0 0 Linear 1 S Shaped Ramp selection Linear or S shaped ramp DV V F S B TRAVEL Ramp setpoint The Function of this block is to generate the Set point for the ramp Set reference by algebraically adding its inputs All parameters in this menu have default values set for lift application TRAVEL Ramp setpoint Ramp ref src 7035 Ramp ref 1 src N A RWS IPA7130 IPA 7130 Lift out sod mon Default It select the origin of the signal of Ramp ref 1 refer to signals List 7 of Pick List manual List 7 PIN V F S B 7036 Ramp ref 2 src N A RWS 7031 IPA 7031 Int ramp ref 2 Default It select the origin of the signal of
43. 1002 p 129 1260 p 155 2007 p 153 2138 p 180 3400 p 152 1003 p 129 1300 p 132 2013 p 153 2380 p 145 3411 p 152 1004 p 129 1301 p 133 2015 p 153 2440 p 154 3412 p 152 1005 p 129 1350 p 126 2021 p 153 2441 p 154 3413 p 152 1006 p 129 1460 p 124 2022 p 153 2442 p 154 3420 p 135 1007 p 129 150 p 160 2031 p 153 2445 p 155 3430 p 135 1011 p 120 151 p 160 2033 p 153 2450 p 154 3520 p 152 1012 p 130 152 p 160 2039 p 154 2530 p 144 3530 p 152 1015 p 129 153 p 159 2041 p 154 2540 p 145 3531 p 152 104 p 191 154 p 159 2048 p 134 2550 p 145 3541 p 152 105 p 191 1540 p 123 2049 p 135 2560 p 145 3570 p 166 106 p 191 156 p 159 2054 p 147 2580 p 147 3575 p 166 107 p 125 157 p 159 2063 p 153 2590 p 147 3576 p 166 1085 p 157 1610 p 135 2065 p 153 2610 p 135 3580 p 166 1086 p 157 1611 p 135 2075 p 152 2625 p 147 3585 p 152 1090 p 156 1612 p 135 2077 p 152 2745 p 158 3700 p 144 152 1091 p 156 162 p 122 2100 p 176 2750 p 158 3701 p 144 152 1092 p 156 163 p 122 2101 p 176 2755 p 158 3702 p 144 1093 p 156 164 p 122 2102 p 176 2756 p 158 3703 p 144 1094 p 156 1650 p 135 2103 p 176 2760 p 158 3704 p 144 1095 p 157 1670 p 123 2104 p 176 2780 p 128 3705 p 144 1096 p 157 170 p 126 2105 p 176 2790 p 128 3706 p 146 1097 p 157 1700 p 136 2106 p 176 2800 p 128 3707 p 146 1098 p 157 1710 p 136 2107 p 177 2810 p 128 3708 p 146 1099 p 157 1720 p 136 2108 p 177 2820 p 128 3709 p 146 110 p125 1730 p 136 2109 p 177 2830 p 128 3720 p 144 1101 5 157 1740 p 136 2110 p 177 2840 p 128 3722 p
44. 121 overload accumulator When 100 is reached BU overload alarm is generated 1540 Drv OL accum 96 R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV V F S B Drive Unit I2t overload accumulator When 100 is reached Drv overload alarm is generated and output inverter current is reduced to drive continuous current 3222 Norm Std enc spd rpm 0 00 0 00 000 PV V F S B Encoder speed of standard feedback connector XE on RV33 regulation board 3223 Norm Exp enc spd rpm R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV V F S B Encoder speed of expanded feedback encoder connector on expansion optional boards 9553 enc position R 0 00 0 00 000 PV F B Raw accumulated encoder pulses of the standard encoder measured in ppr x 4 9554 Exp enc position cnt R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV F B Raw accumulated encoder pulses of the expanded encoder measured in ppr x 4 9555 Std sin enc mod cnt 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV F B Module of and trace of sinusoidal encoder on std port Encoder peak voltage is constantly monitored and the alarm Speed feedback loss is generated if it is outside the range min IPA 1902 5 max IPA 1902 2 9072 HT sensor temp C R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV V F S B Drive Heatsink temperature 9073 RG sensor temp C R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV V F S B Temperature on the regulation card RV33 9095 IA sensor temp C R 0 00 0 00 000 PV V F S B Temperature of the heatsink incoming air temperature available from 18 5kW up to 160kW 9090 Sequencer status N A R 0 00
45. 144 1102 p 157 1781 p 123 2111 p 177 2850 p 128 3723 p 144 1103 0187 1810 155 2112 p 177 2860 p 128 3724 p 145 1104 p157 1815 p 155 2113 p 177 2870 p 128 3725 p 145 1105 p 157 1833 p 148 2114 p 177 2880 p 129 3726 p 145 1108 p 157 1834 p 148 2115 p 177 2890 p 129 3727 p 145 1107 p 157 1835 p 148 2116 p 177 2900 p 129 380 p 126 111 p125 1836 p 148 2120 p 179 300 p 124 3900 p 165 11170157 1837 148 2121 p 179 3060 p 122 3901 p 168 1112 p 157 1880 p 126 2122 p 179 3070 p 122 3902 p 172 1120 p 156 1885 p 129 2123 p 179 3080 p 122 3903 p 176 1121 p 155 1890 p 132 2124 p 179 3090 p 122 396 p 182 1130 p 156 1900 p 133 2125 p 179 3100 p 123 4002 p 159 114 p 124 1902 p 132 2126 p 180 3110 p 123 4004 p 159 1140 0 156 1925 p 131 2127 p 180 3120 p 123 4006 p 160 1141 p 156 1926 p 132 2128 p 180 3130 p 123 4011 p 169 115 p 125 1927 p 132 2129 p 180 3140 p 123 4012 p 169 1150 p 156 1931 p 132 2130 p 180 3180 p 123 4013 p 169 1170 p 156 1936 p 134 2131 p 180 3190 p 123 4014 p 169 1180 p 156 1940 p 131 2132 p 180 3200 p 122 4015 p 169 1190 p 154 1952 p 133 2133 p 180 3210 p 122 4016 p 169 1210 p 154 1962 p 133 2134 p 180 3222 p 123 4017 p 170 1220 p 155 1999 p 153 2135 p 180 3223 p 123 4020 p 170 2000 p 153 2136 p 180 3230 p 124 4021 p 170 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 12 Parameters Index 217 4022 p 170 4084 p 175 4155 p 197 5011 p 160 6015 p 166 4023 p 170 4085 p 175 4156 p 197 5012 p 160 6016 p 166 4024 p 170 4086 p 175 4157 p 197 5020
46. 37kW 2kHz 4kHz 8kHz 12kHz 16kHz 222 Default Table 2 3 4 2 shows overload current values for typical service profiles Ambient temperature 40 C 104 F standard switching frequency After overload cycle the output current is reduced to nominal output current by the drive control In order to allow next overload cycle output current should be decreased reducing the load to value less then nominal Table states overload recovery pause time with current reduced to 90 continuous current The coordination of the motor rated powers with the Drive type presented in the table below refers to the use of standard 4 poles motors with a rated voltage equal to the rated voltage of the input supply As for those motors with different voltages the type of Drive to use is determined by the rated current of the motor Motor nominal current cannot be lower than 0 3 x Magnetizing motor current must not be higher of I oyr 22 Chapter 2 Inspection procedures Components Identification and Std Specs ARTDriveL Instruction Manual tions AC ee Table 2 3 4 1 OLOTIGVL reuondo Sureaq 2506 onbzoj Suryerg 10181891 eu193xo tr euojur uond o sureur 2VA 9 107 93A 9 o qepreA por 918 uo s opour ay Apuo sanas pA AV pue POV AAV 103 mn sjrejop 1 10j 9 1o deuo Je age 99g pojuouo ur 8 0 19jo1 Aouonbo
47. 4 9 2 2 Limit Operating Braking Cycle with Typical Triangular Power 59 Figure 4 9 2 3 Braking Cycle with TBR 2096 arinnar aai Figure 4 9 2 4 Generic Braking Cycle with Triangular Profile Table 4 9 2 2 Braking Thresholds for Different Mains serene Table 4 9 2 3 Technical Data of the Internal Braking Units sette 4 10 Buffering the Regulator Supply 5 reiten nena et tenens Table 4 10 1 DC Link Butler Time trt rtr pier ri Figure 4 10 1 Buffering the Regulator Supply by Means of Additional Intermediate Circuit Capacitors 64 4 11 Discharge Time of the DO D ink ir iR 65 Table 4 11 1 DC Link Discharge Time 2 2 Hia EL HER 65 Chapter 5 Serial Interface Description 67 Figure 5 T 5485 Serial Interface itii n ete i i a 67 5 1 RS 485 Serial Interface Connector Description ccccccccceceeeseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 68 Table 5 1 1 Assignment of the Plug XS Connector for the RS 485 Serial Interface 68 Chapter 6 Keypad Operation essesssssseeseseeeeeeee entrent 69 6 1 LEDS amp Keys ie c c hc bn Red 69 6 2 Moving Inside ai GNU estes cuca care ate corre Eran cin nii seit riori a ile 71 6 3 USING Tene 71 6 4 Drive Main Menu
48. 7 Strain Hazard Improper lifting practices can cause serious or fatal injury Lift only with adequate equipment and trained personnel Attention l l vation Une l vation inappropri e peut causer des dommages s rieux ou fatals Il doit tre lev seulement avec des moyens appropri s et par du person nel qualifi Drives and motors must be ground connected according to the NEC Tous les moteurs et les drives doivent tre mis la terre selon le Code Electrique National ou quivalent Replace all covers before applying power to the Drive Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury Remettre tous les capots avant de mettre sous tension le drive Des erreurs peuvent provoquer de s rieux accidents ou m me la mort Adjustable frequency drives are electrical apparatus for use in indus trial installations Parts of the Drives are energized during operation The electrical installation and the opening of the device should there fore only be carried out by qualified personnel Improper installation a of motors or Drives may therefore cause the failure of the device as well Warning as serious injury to persons or material damage Drive is not equipped with motor overspeed protection logic other than that controlled by software Follow the instructions given in this manual and observe the local and national safety regulations applicable Les drives a fr quence variable sont des dispositifs lectriques utilis
49. 7 1 3 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Scroll v to Encoders config menu Startup config Encoders config Speed fbk sel Std encoder Std enc type Digital Press to set from Digital to Sinusoidal press to confirm Std enc type Sinusoidal Scroll to set encoder pulses per revolution factory setting 1024ppr Std enc pulses 1024 ppr Press and set the new encoder pulses press to confirm Press o to exit from Encoders config menu Chapter 7 Commissioning 83 e Scroll to Encoders config menu Startup config Encoder type Encoders config configuration Encoder config Speed fbk sel Feedback from Std encoder encoder connected to XFI connector on EXP optional card Speed fbk sel Std encoder Speed fbk sel Exp encoder Speed fbk sel Exp encoder Press seven times Exp enc pulses 1024 ppr Press Qo and set the new encoder pulses press do to confirm lt to exit from Encoders config menu Now go to step up to step or chapter 7 1 3 84 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 7 1 2 Sensorless vector mode Sensorless vector mode set up ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Power up the drive This operation will take about 10 seconds and the drive will display LEDs blink for test AC Drive Lift Startup after 10 seconds R 0 S 0 MONITOR R 0 S 0 STARTUP Nore Upon opening the S
50. 9064 p 183 930 p 127 9554 p 123 7060 p 138 8056 p 139 9065 p 184 9340 p 177 9555 p 123 7061 p 138 8057 p 140 9066 p 184 9341 p 177 9557 p 133 7062 p 138 8078 p 141 9067 p 184 9342 p 178 9600 p 184 7063 p 138 8090 p 141 9068 p 186 9343 p 178 9603 p 184 7064 p 138 810 p 125 9071 p 188 9344 p 178 9604 p 184 7065 p 138 8998 p 192 9072 p 123 9345 p 178 9605 p 185 7066 p 138 8999 p 191 9073 p 123 9346 p 178 9606 p 185 7067 p 138 9000 p 193 9074 p 187 9347 p 178 9608 p 188 7069 p 141 9001 p 193 9075 p 183 9348 p 178 9610 p 189 7070 p 141 9002 p 193 9076 p 182 9349 p 178 9611 p 189 7072 p 140 9003 p 193 9086 p 186 9350 p 178 9612 p 189 7073 p 141 9004 p 193 9087 p 185 9351 p 178 9614 p 189 7074 p 141 9005 p 193 9088 p 185 9352 p 178 9615 p 189 710 p 127 9010 p 192 9089 p 185 9353 p 178 9616 p 189 7100 p 140 9011 p 192 9090 p 123 9354 p 179 9630 p 189 7101 p 140 9012 p 192 9095 p 123 9355 p 179 9631 p 189 7102 p 140 9013 p 192 9099 p 187 9356 p 179 9632 p 189 7103 p 140 9014 p 192 9100 p 201 9360 p 180 9634 p 189 7104 p 140 9015 p 192 9101 p 201 9361 p 180 9635 p 190 7105 p 140 9020 p 192 9102 p 201 9362 p 180 9636 p 190 7106 p 140 9021 p 192 9103 p 201 9363 p 180 9640 p 183 7110 p 138 9022 p 192 9104 p 202 9364 p 180 9641 p 183 7115 p 140 9023 p 192 9105 p 202 9365 p 180 970 p 127 7116 p 140 9024 p 192 9106 p 202 9366 p 180 98 p 125 7117 p 140 9025 p 192 9107 p 202 9367 p 181 980 p 127 7118 p 142 9030 p 193 9108 p 202 9368 p 181 99 p 125 ARTDrivel Instr
51. A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 2 of Word 0 decomposed displaying ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 179 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 2126 WO decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 3 of Word 0 decomposed displaying 2127 B4 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 4 of Word 0 decomposed displaying 2128 5 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 5 of Word 0 decomposed displaying 2129 B6 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 6 of Word 0 decomposed displaying 2130 7 WO decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 7 of Word 0 decomposed displaying 2131 8 WO decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 8 of Word 0 decomposed displaying 2132 B9 WO decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 9 of Word 0 decomposed displaying 2133 B10 W0 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 10 of Word 0 decomposed displaying 2134 B11 W0 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 11 of Word 0 decomposed displaying 2135 B12 W0 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 12 of Word 0 decomposed displaying 2136 B13 W0 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 13 of Word 0 decomposed displaying 2137 B14 W0 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 14 of Word 0 decomposed displaying 2138 B15 W0 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 15 of Word 0 decomposed displaying 1 0 CONFIG Word gt Bits Word1 gt Bits src 9361 W1 decomp src N A RWS 9360 List 27 PIN V F S B IPA 9360 W1 decomp inp Default It allows to connect the word t
52. A RWS 1 16 16 PP V F S B Analog Input 3 scale factor 5046 Aninp3 filter sec RWS 0 0064 0 00 4 096 V F S B Time constant of the Analog Input 3 filter 5047 An inp 3 lo lim cnt RWS 16384 32768 32767 PP V F S B Lower limit of the Analog Input 3 block output in count see figure of Analog Input 1 above 5048 An inp 3 hi lim cnt RWS 16383 32768 32767 PP V F S B Upper limit of the Analog Input 3 block output in count see figure of Analog Input 1 above Al 3 offs tune Refer to Al 1 offs tune description above Al 3 gain tune Refer to Al 1 gain tune description above Analog inputs Std analog inps Analog input 3 An inp 3 mon 5049 An inp 3 output cnt R 0 00 32768 32767 PV V F S B Analog Input 3 output count displaying 5050 Aninp3 lt thr N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Display of threshold compensator state of Analog Input 3 1 the condition is true 5041 An inp offset cnt RWS 0 16384 16383 PP V F S B Analog Input 3 offset count value displaying 5045 Aninp3 gain RWS 1 16 16 PP V F S B Analog Input 3 gain count value displaying Analog inputs Exp analog inps Analog input 1X An inp 1X src 5069 1Xsgn src N A RWS 4000 List3 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It connects the selected signal to the selector of the multiplier input if the signal is 0 multiply by 1 or if the signal is 1 multiply by 1 The multiplier allows to invert Analog Input 1X sign
53. An Inp 2 block refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual Analog inputs Std analog inps Analog input 2 An inp 2 cfg 5020 An inp 2 type N A RWS 0 0 2 DP V F S B 0 10V 10V 1 0 20mA 0 10V 3 4 20mA For An inp 2 type description refer to An inp 1 type description above 5022 2 alt value cnt RWS 0 32767 32767 PV V F S B Alternative reference value in count for Analog input 2 5023 An inp 2 thr cnt RWS 3277 16384 16383 PP V F S B Analog Input 2 threshold value in count 5024 2 scale N A Rws 1 16 16 PP V F S B Analog Input 2 scale factor 5026 An inp 2 filter sec RWS 0 0064 0 00 4 096 PP V F S B Time constant of the Analog Input 2 filter 5027 2 lo lim cnt RWS 16384 32768 32767 PP V F S B Lower limit of the Analog Input 2 block output in count see figure of Analog Input 1 above 5028 An inp 2 hi lim cnt RWS 16383 32768 32767 PP V F S B Upper limit of the Analog Input 2 block output in count see figure of Analog Input 1 above Al 2 offs tune Start Refer to Al 1 offs tune description above Al 2 gain tune Start Refer to Al 1 gain tune description above Analog inputs Std analog inps Analog input 2 An inp 2 mon 5029 Aninp 2 output cnt R 0 00 32768 32767 PV V F S B Analog Input 2 output count displaying 5030 Aninp 2 lt thr N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Display of threshold compensator state of Analog Input 2
54. B Displaying of the Ramp setpoint output signal ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 149 Access IPA Description Unit Ramp ref 1 mon Ramp ref 1 src Default Max Ramp setpoint Format Reg Mode 14 2 gt gt o o Lift out spd mon Ramp ref 3 mon Ramp ref 3 src Int ramp ref 3 Ramp ref 2 mon Ramp ref 2 src Int ramp ref 2 DOWN Cont mon Ramp ref inv src Ramp ref Ramp out mon Ramp shape 1 Switch is closed if Ramp out enable Enabled amp Start Switch is opened if Ramp out enable Enabled amp Stop 2 Switch is closed if Ramp out enable Enabled amp Fast stop Switch is opened if Ramp out enable Enabled amp Fast stop Both switches are closed if Ramp out enable Disabled TRAVEL Speed setpoint The function of the block is to generate the set point for the speed regulator by algebraically adding its inputs see ramp set point All parameters in this menu have default values set for lift application TRAVEL Speed setpoint Speed ref src 7050 Speed ref 1 src N A RWS 7040 List9 PIN V F S B IPA 7040 Int speed ref 1 Default It select the origin of the signal of Speed ref 1 in V f SLS LZ speed ref IPA 9408 in FOC BRS refer to signals List 9 of Pick List manual List 9 7051 Speed ref 2 src N A RWS 7041 List 10 PIN V F S B IPA 7041 Int speed ref 2 Defaul
55. Chapter 9 Parameter 173 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 4066 DO1src N A RWS 7123 Listi V F S B IPA 7123 BRAKE cont mon Default It allows to connect the selected signal to the Digital output 2 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 4067 DO2src N A RWS IPA161 List1 V F S B IPA 161 Drive ready Default It allows to connect the selected signal to the Digital output 3 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 4068 DO3src N A RWS 3728 List1 V F S B IPA 3728 Speed is zero Default It allows to connect the selected signal to the Digital output 2 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 1 0 CONFIG Digital outputs Std digital outs Std dig out cfg 4060 00 0 inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4061 DO 1 inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4062 DO 2 inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4063 00 3 inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 1 0 CONFIG Digital outputs Std digital outs Std dig out mon 4064 DO 3210 N A RWS 0 0 DP V F S B The digital output logical state is displayed under each number 1 0 CONFIG Digital outputs Exp digital outs Exp dig out src 4080 DO 0X src N A RWS IPA7122 Listi PIN V F S B IPA 7122 RUN cont mon Default It allows to connect the selected signal to the Digital output OX refer to signals
56. Codes for All Autotune Procedures 213 Table 10 2 3 1 Error Messages from Autotune Procedures sse 213 Chapter 11 EMC Directive Declaration of Conformity 214 Chapter 12 Parameters Index sessssssesseeeeeeeneenen nnne ntnnns 217 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Table of Contents 5 Safety Symbol Legend Precautions de securit Indicates a procedure condition or statement that if not strictly observed could result in personal injury or death Indique le mode d utilisation la proc dure et la condition d exploitation Si ces consignes ne sont pas strictement respect es il y a des risques de blessures corporelles ou de mort Warning Indicates a procedure condition or statement that if not strictly observed could result in damage to or destruction of equipment Indique et le mode d utilisation la proc dure et la condition d exploitation Si ces consignes ne sont pas strictement respect es il y a des risques de d t rioration ou de destruction des appareils Caution Indicates a procedure condition or statement that should be be strictly followed in order to optimize these applications Indique le mode d utilisation la proc dure et la condition d exploitation AHention Ces consignes doivent tre rigoureusement respect es pour optimiser ces applications Nore Indicates an essential or important procedure condition or stateme
57. List 1 of Pick List manual 4081 DO 1X src N A RWS IPA7120 List1 PIN V F S B IPA 7120 UP cont mon Default It allows to connect the selected signal to the Digital output 1X refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 4082 DO 2 src N A RWS IPA7121 List1 PIN V F S B IPA 7121 DOWN cont mon Default It allows to connect the selected signal to the Digital output 2X refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 4083 src N A RWS 7139 List1 V F S B IPA 7139 Door open mon Default It allows to connect the selected signal to the Digital output 2X refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 174 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 4084 DO 4Xsrc N A RWS 4000 Listi V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the selected signal to the Digital output 4X refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 4085 DO 5 src N A RWS 4000 List1 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the selected signal to the Digital output 5X refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 4086 DO 6 src N A RWS 4000 Listi V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the selected signal to the Digital output 6X refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 4087 DO 7X src N A RWS 4000 Listi V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the selected signal to
58. Mains voltage Ambient temp Switching freq Speed reference resolution Set Motor data Motor Data parameters Rated voltage Rated current Rated speed Pole pairs Torque constant EMF constant Stator resistance and LsS inductance Run current Regulator Autotune procedure measures a real motor parameters Autotune Curr Reg autotune can be used when motor is coupled to gearbox and lift car is installed It could cause limited shaft rotation Escape setup mode During this operation a Load setup is required to load all datas changes into SETUP MODE Set all system System mechanical data mechanical data Gearbox ratio Pulley diameter Full scale speed Set all system System weights data weight data Cabin weight Counter weight Load weight Rope weight Motor inertia Gearbox inertia Encoder configuration Feedback source type selection Sinusoidal Hall Sinusoidal SinCos Sinusoidal Extern Digital Hall DigitalExtern SinCos Resolver and Hyperface Set braking unit Braking Unit parameters Braking unit type internal parameters external Braking unit resistance Braking unit power Save configuration Use Save Config to save all the changes made in the made in startup menu Startup menu Set speed profile A binary combination of three digital input allows to select up to 8 different speed setpoints Accelerations jerk and decelerations jerk can be set in Set ramp profile the ramp p
59. N A R 0 00 PV V F S B Asynchronous Word 5 monitor from DGFC to Drive 4166 DGFC A Drv W6mon N A R 0 00 PV V F S B Asynchronous Word 6 monitor from DGFC to Drive 4167 DGFC A Drv W7mon N A R 0 00 PV V F S B Asynchronous Word 7 monitor from DGFC to Drive 4168 DGFC A Drv W8mon N A R 0 00 PV V F S B Asynchronous Word 8 monitor from DGFC to Drive 4169 DGFC A W9mon N A R 0 00 PV V F S B Asynchronous Word 9 monitor from DGFC to Drive ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 197 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode SAVE PARAMETERS AVyL drive allows two different commands to save the parameters modified in the regulation mode selected by STARTUP menu Save Config command by all other menus SAVE PARAMETERS command Any changes made in STARTUP menu require Save Config command which saves all entire regulation mode selected It is recommended every time the user made any changes into STARTUP menu SAVE PARAMETERS command saves all the changes made out of STARTUP menu only When on the keypad display appears blinking message Use Save Config use Save Config command 198 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode The access to CUSTOM FUNCTIONS menu is allowed by Level 1 password 12345 It must to be set in the SERVICE menu COMPARE T
60. Negative torque current Torque Positive torque current Alarm Alarm condition Enable Drive enable status ZeroSpeed Speed lt zero speed threshold E 5 E E Limit Actual current gt current limit Press 2 sec to disable A Navigation Escape lt This monitoring module can be upgraded with the keypad with alphanumeric LCD display Note a replacement keypad cable longer than 20 cm must be shielded 6 1 LEDs amp Keys The LEDs present on the keypad are used to quickly diagnose the operating state of the drive _ Designation Color Function ENABLE green the LED is lit when the drive is enabled Zero speed the LED is lit when motor speed is zero Limit the LED is lit when the drive operates at a current limit Shift the LED is lit when the keypad second functions are enabled 18030 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 6 Keypad Operation 69 Control Text reference Function START key commands the drive to Enable START and Start Command select 1 key STOP key commands to Stop and disable STOP Command select 1 key Stop key also resets the sequencer after an alarm event 7 Motor pot and Jog functions are not available on Increase Jog ARTDriveL version Motor pot and Jog functions are not available on Decrease Rotation control AR
61. O status 4028 01 7654321 N A R 0 0 1 DP V F S B Standard digital inputs status from 0 to 7 E Enable Digital Input 0 4064 00 3210 N A R 0 0 1 DP V F S B Standard digital outputs status from 0 to 3 4057 DIX BA9876543210 N A R 0 0 1 DP V F S B Expanded digital inputs status from 0 to 11 A Digital InputX 10 B Digital InputX 11 X suffix means expanded 4078 DOX 76543210 N A R 0 0 1 DP V F S B Expanded digital outputs status from 0 to 7 X suffix means expanded 122 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode MONITOR Advanced Status 3100 DC link voltage V R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV V F S B Drive DC link voltage 3110 Magnetizing curr A R 0 00 0 00 000 PV V F S B Drive magnetizing current 3120 Torque curr A R 0 00 0 00 000 PV V F S B Drive torque current 3130 Magn curr ref A R 0 00 0 00 000 PV F S B Drive magnetizing current reference 3140 Torque curr ref A R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV F S B Drive torque current reference 3180 Flux ref Wb R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV F S B Drive flux reference 3190 Flux Wb R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV F S B Drive flux 1670 Mot OL accum R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV V F S B Motor I2t overload accumulator When 100 is reached Mot overload alarm is generated and output inverter current is reduced to motor continuous current 1781 BU OL accum R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV V F S B Braking Unit
62. Pad parameters Pad param word 9100 N A RWS 0 PV V F S B Analog Pad 0 9101 Pad 1 N A RWS 0 PV V F S B Analog Pad 1 9102 Pad2 N A RWS 0 PV V F S B Analog Pad 2 9103 N A RWS 0 PV V F S B Analog Pad 3 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 201 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 9104 Pad4 N A RWS 0 PV V F S B Analog Pad 4 9105 5 N A RWS 0 PV V F S B Analog Pad 5 9106 Pad6 N A RWS 0 PV V F S B Analog Pad 6 9107 Pad7 N A RWS 0 PV V F S B Analog Pad 7 9108 Pad8 N A RWS 0 PV V F S B Analog Pad 8 9109 Pad9 N A RWS 0 PV V F S B Analog Pad 9 9110 Pad10 N A RWS 0 PV V F S B Analog Pad 10 9111 Padii N A RWS 0 PV V F S B Analog Pad 11 9112 Pad12 N A RWS 0 PV V F S B Analog Pad 12 9113 13 N A RWS 0 PV V F S B Analog Pad 13 9114 Pad14 N A RWS 0 PV V F S B Analog Pad 14 9115 15 N A RWS 0 PV V F S B Analog Pad 15 CUSTOM FUNCTIONS Pad parameters Pad param bit 9116 Dig pad 0 N A RWS 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Pad 1 9117 Digpadi N A RWS 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Pad 2 9118 Dig pad 2 N A RWS 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Pad 3 9119 Dig pad 3 N A RWS 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Pad 3 9120 Dig pad 4 N A RWS 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Pad 4 9121 Dig pad 5 N A RWS 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Pad 5 9122 Dig pa
63. Reg Mode 1 0 CONFIG Digital inputs Digital Input Block function allows to invert the signal on the terminal strip For example if the potential available on the terminal strip is 24V and the inversion is disabled not inverted the input state is 1 ONE standard configuration if the inversion is enabled inversion the input state is 0 NULL The Drive ENABLE is set on the Digital input 0 such condition can not be changed as it is performed via the hardware Its function anyway can be combined with a command signal in the sources of the other Blocks DI 0 Enable mon signal Digital input 0 signal is available in the List 3 En DIO DI 0 Enable mon Hw Drive Enable Di 1 DI 1 monitor 3 DI 2 inversion DI 2 monitor Not inverted DI 3 inversion DI 3 monitor Not inverted DI 4 inversion Not inverted DI 5 inversion Not inverted DI 4 monitor DI 5 monitor DI 6 inversion Not inverted DI 6 monitor DI 7 monitor KA Xo NOM NC DI 7 inversion Not inverted 1 0 CONFIG Digital inputs Std digital inps Std dig inp cfg 4011 011 inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4012 DI 2 inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4013 DI 3 inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4014 014 inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP 0 Not inverte
64. available for the regulation This value is usually equal to 2 of the maximum output voltage A higher value allows a faster response of the voltage regulator but with a lower amount of available voltage on the output A lower value allows a higher output voltage with a decrease of the dynamic performances REGULATION PARAM Flux config Output vit ref Out vit ref src 1141 lim src N A RWS 1140115142 PIN F S B 1140 Int Outvit lim Default It allows to select the origin of the signal to control the function refer to signals List 42 of Pick List manual REGULATION PARAM Flux config Output vit ref Out vit ref cfg 1130 Dyn vit margin RWS 2 1 10 PV F S B Voltage margin for the flux regulation 1140 Int Outvit lim V RWS Calc Calc Calc PV F S B Internal output voltage limit initialized from motor rated voltage This parameter determines the start of flux weakening Connected to Outvit lim src REGULATION PARAM Flux config Output vit ref Out vit ref mon 1170 Available Outvlt V R 0 00 0 00 000 PV F S B Monitor for the maximum available output voltage t is calculated directly starting from the DC link voltage 1180 Inuse Outvit ref V R 0 00 0 00 000 PV F S B Limit in use on the output voltage REGULATION PARAM Sis SpdFbk gains In the Sensorless regulation mode the motor speed is estimated through an observer algorithm based on a speed gains profile The procedure below al
65. be at least 150 mm 6 inches A space of at least 50 mm 2 inches must be ensured at the front On size 81600 the top and bottom clearance must be at least 380 mm 15 inches on front and sides must be ensured a space of at least 140 mm 5 5 inches Devices that generate a large amount of heat must not be mounted in the direct vicinity of the drive Figure 3 3 2 Mounting Clearance A 2150 mm 6 380mm 15 D E Tn p o r E _ 4 L i o BE 4 gt e 4 aN gt 10 04 gt 20 mm 0 8 gt 450 mm 6 210 mm 0 4 gt 50 mm 2 140mm 5 5 140mm 5 5 380mm 15 140mm 5 5 140mm 5 5 Y m He for 81600 size Nore Fastening screws should be re tightened after a few days of operation 34 Chapter 3 Installation Guidelines ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 4 1 Accessing the Connectors 4 1 1 Removing the Covers Note Observe the safety instructions and warnings given in this manual The devices can be opened without the use of force Only use the tools specified Figure 4 1 1 Removing the Covers Sizes 1007 to 3150 no 2 for 4 20 40 30 60 1 size Sizes 1007 to 2075 The terminal cover and cable entry plate of the device must be removed in order to fit the electrical connections unscrew the screw 1 remove the cover of device
66. f voltage parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 10 Troubleshooting 211 on the keypad Press the Shift key and then the Help key the following will be displayed Max Value Min Value Def ault Value Unit Raw value IPA Description Access mode In most cases it is enough to set a new value which is within the limits DB error code list 0 No error 1 SBI PROBLEM 0x01 2 Generic error 3 Attribute not exist 4 Limit High 5 Limit Low 11 Division by zero 12 Int Overflow 13 Int Underflow 14 Long Overflow 15 Long Underflow 16 Domain Error 17 Indirection Error 18 Reached wrong eof 19 Dbase not configured 20 Value not valid 21 Process doesn t reply 22 Wrong record size 23 Attribute read only 24 SBI PROBLEM 0x18 25 Command not yet implemented 26 Command wrong 2T Read file error 28 Header wrong 20 Reserved for internal use 30 Parameter not exist 3l Parameter read only 32 Parameter Z only 48 SBI PROBLEM 0x30 212 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 10 2 3 List of Error Codes for All Autotune Procedures The different autotune procedures for Current regulator Flux regulator Speed regulator or Analog input calibration may generate error messages that are described in section 10 2 2 Table 10 2 3 1 Error Messages from Autotune Procedures Error text Description No error Abort The user entered Escape or O key or removed enable permissive term 12 low
67. fILim I gain rnm RWS Calc Calc PP V Integral gain of the pseudo current loop regulator in V f mode REGULATION PARAM Spd regulator REGULATION PARAM Spd regulator Percent values 3700 SpdP1 gain 96 RWS Calc 0 00 00 PP F S B Proportional speed 1 gain regulator at high speed 3701 8 1 gain RWS Calc 0 00 00 PP F S B Integral speed 1 gain regulator at high speed REGULATION PARAM Spd regulator Base values 2075 SpdP base value RWS Calc 0 00 000 F S B Basic value of the speed Proportional gain 2077 Spdi base value RWS 0 00 FK F S B Basic value of the speed Integral gain 152 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode REGULATION PARAM Spd regulator In use values 2063 InUse SpdP gain R 10 0 100 PV F S B In use value of the speed Proportional gain 2065 InUse Spdl gain R 10 0 100 PV F S B In use value of the speed Integral gain REGULATION PARAM Curr regulator REGULATION PARAM Curr regulator Percent values 1999 CurrP gain RWS Calc 0 00 100 PP V F S B Proportional gain of current loop 2000 gain RWS Calc 0 00 100 PP V F S B Integral gain of current loop REGULATION PARAM Curr regulator Base values 2005 CurrP base value VA RWS 0 00 V F S B Basic value of the proportional g
68. inp 6 src p 203 ConnectA inp 7 src p 203 ConnectB inp 0 src p 203 ConnectB inp 1 src p 203 ConnectB inp 2 src p 203 ConnectB inp src p 203 ConnectB inp 4 src p 204 ConnectB inp 5 src p 204 ConnectB inp 6 src p 204 ConnectB inp 7 src p 204 Cont close delay p 140 Cont open delay p 140 Contact feedback p 185 Cosfi p 127 Counter weight p 129 CPU1 runtime p 124 CPU2 runtime p 124 Curr regulato p 153 Currl base value p 153 Currl gain p 153 CurrP base value p 153 CurrP gain p 153 CurrReg p 128 CUSTOM FUNCTIONS p 199 D DC braking p 148 DC link voltage p 123 DCbrake cmd src p 121 148 DCbrake current p 148 DCbrake delay p 148 DCbrake duration p 148 DCBrake state p 148 Dead time limit p 153 Dead time slope p 153 Destinations p 172 DGFC async Ch p 195 DGFC config p 194 DGFC enable p 194 DGFC sync Ch p 194 195 196 197 DGFC A Drv W mon p 197 DGFC A Drv W1mon p 197 DGFC A Drv W2mon p 197 DGFC A Drv W3mon p 197 DGFC A Drv W4mon p 197 DGFC A Drv W5mon p 197 DGFC A Drv W6mon p 197 DGFC A Drv W7mon p 197 DGFC A Drv W8mon p 197 DGFC A Drv W9mon p 197 DGFC S Drv WOmon p 195 DGFC S Drv W1mon p 195 DGFC S Drv W2mon p 195 DGFC S Drv W3mon p 195 DGFC S Drv W4mon p 195 DI OX inversion p 170 DI OX monitor p 171 DI 1X inversion p 170 DI 1X monitor p 171 DI 2X inversion p 170 DI 2X monitor p 171 DI inversion p 170 DI 3X monitor p 171 DI 4X inversion p 170 DI 4X moni
69. is operating the temperature of the Drive s cooling fins can rise to a temperature of 194 F 90 C Le drive doit tre mont sur un mur construit avec des mat riaux r sistants la chaleur Pendant le fonctionnement du drive la temp rature des ailettes du dissipateur thermique peut arriver 194 F 90 Do not touch or damage any components when handling the device The changing of the isolation gaps or the removing of the isolation and covers is not permissible Manipuler l appareil de fagon ne pas toucher ou endommager des parties Il n est pas permis de changer les distances d isolement ou bien d enlever des mat riaux isolants ou des capots Protect the device from impermissible environmental conditions tem perature humidity shock etc Prot ger l appareil contre des effets ext rieurs non permis temp rature humidit chocs etc No voltage should be connected to the output of the drive terminals U2 V2 W2 The parallel connection of several drives via the outputs and the direct connection of the inputs and outputs bypass are not permissible Aucune tension ne doit tre appliqu e sur la sortie du convertisseur bornes U2 V2 et W2 Il n est pas permis de raccorder la sortie de ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 0 Safety Precautions 11 plusieurs convertisseurs en parall le ni d effectuer une connexion directe de l entr e avec la sortie du convertisseur Bypass A capacitative lo
70. is selected as Ignore or Warning 3 No limit on duration of this time interval 100 Cont current 4 Next overload cycle is allowed after 24 Chapter 2 Inspection procedures Components Identification and Std Specs ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Continuous current 400V 5450 93 5550 14 Table 2 3 4 2 B Overload Capability Sizes 5450 81600 T2SLOW SLOW TISLOW SLOW Overload TFFAST FAST Overload Overload Overload pause time Overload Overload Overload current 29096 time sec current Cont curr Ll Bg e ij ied I 3 La 5 1702 1 36 2 _ 5 TL2021 LOW Frequency lt 3Hz overload factor LOW Frequency lt 3Hz overload time 1 RE 6 Em 6 259 9 9 E 6 I 6 Overload Level 96 TF Lo to FastOvidCurrentLevel SlowOvidCurrentLevel 100 ContinuousCurrentLevel 90 ContinuousCurrentLevel Drive current is limited to 100 level when drive overload alarm is selected ad current must be reduced to 90 level as Ignore Warning allow next overload cycle ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Time sec Chapter 2 Inspection procedures Components Identification and Std Specs 25 2 3 5 1 0 and Encoder Specifications 1 0 Enable inputs 0 15 30V 3 2 6 4 mA 5 mA 24 V Analog inputs Selectable 0 10V 0 25mA max 0 20 mA 10V max 4 20 mA 10 V max Max common mode voltage 0 10 V
71. it by holding the cards Caution ERN D 4 2 Power Section Please note that a wrong connection on motor phases can cause the motor to move without control and can destroy the drive Caution Please check that motor phases are connected in the right sequence before enabling the drive 36 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 3Ph Internal braking resistor On FAN CEXP 4 2 1 Terminal Assignment on Power Section Cable Cross Section Table 4 2 1 1 Power Section Terminals from 1007 to 3150 po Function max 230V 15 AC mains voltage 460V 15 3Ph Braking unit resistor command braking resistor must be connected between BR1 and C 770V DC 1 65 output current Intermediate circuit connection AC line volt 3Ph 1 36 output current Motor connection Motor ground connection EM Note Emergency module signal required to interface the drive 022A EM with the EMS device Emergency Module Supplier za EM and FEXT terminals are available on sizes FEXT T AVy2040AC4 up to Logic fan control signal repeated on an external fan Me AVy5550AC4 BR4 only FEXT PE ZA Grounding protective earth conductor Table 4 2 1 2 Power Section Terminals from 4185 to 81600 max loH um 230V 15 3Ph 2 v2 AC mains voltage 460V 15 3Ph A W3 ed c URS 770V DC
72. m RWS 0 0 30000 PP External fault hold off V F S B ALARM CONFIG Motor OT Motor Over Temperature indicated via thermal contact or PTC thermistor on 78 79 drive regulation board terminals 9065 MOT activity N A RWS 2 2 6 DP 2 Warning 3 Disable drive 4 Stop 5 Fast stop 6 Curr limstp Motor Over Temperature activity 9066 MOT restart N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 off 1 on Motor Over Temperature restart 9067 MOT restart time ms RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V F S B Motor Over Temperature restart time 9603 MOT hold off ms RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V F S B Motor Over Temperature hold off ALARM CONFIG Heatsink S OT Heatsink Sensor Over Temperature detected by a sensor 9054 HTS activity N A RWS 3 2 6 DP 2 Warning 3 Disable drive 4 Stop 5 Fast stop 6 Curr limstp Heatsink Sensor Over Temperature activity 9055 restart N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 off 1 on Heatsink Sensor Over Temperature restart 9056 HTS restart time ms RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V F S B Heatsink Sensor Over Temperature restart time 9604 HTS hold off ms RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V F S B Heatsink Sensor Over Temperature hold off 184 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode ALARM CONFIG Regulation S OT Regulation card Sensor Over Temperature 9057 RGS activity N A RWS 3 2 6 DP V F S B 2 Warning 3 Disable drive 4 Stop
73. none 30V D 13 Digital input 1 Programmable input Default setting START FWD 32mA 15V U 14 Digital input 2 Programmable input Default setting START REW 5mA 24V 1 Digital input 3 Programmable input Default setting NULL 6 4mA 30V 15 gital inp gi p g 0 16 COM DI O Reference point for digital inputs and outputs term 12 15 36 39 41 42 E n 0V24 Reference point for 24V OUT supply terminal 19 Ply 22 28V D 19 24V OUT 24V supply output Reference point terminal 18 or 27 or 28 120mA 24V Anal tput A 21 a one Programmable analog output Default setting NULL 10V 5mA 1 T 22 ov Internal OV and reference point for terminals 21 and 23 1 Analog output A 23 n i 85 Programmable analog output Default setting NULL 10V 5mA BU 1 26 output VeCon controlled BU braking units command Ref point term 27 28V 15mA BU 27 0V24 Reference point for BU command terminal 26 External braking unit optional 1 28 RESERVED F 29 RESERVED 36 Digital input 4 Default setting SPD SO 30V 37 Digital input 5 2 Default setting MLT SPD 51 3 2mA 15V Default setting MLT SPD S2 Configurable as 2nd encoder index qualifier EM setting igu s q 38 Dietalmput s amp setting via S30 jumper Digital input 6 parameter must be set as not used RA QA re o Default setting FAULT RESET Configurable as 1st encoder index
74. or 10 mA digital or PIN3 ENC C Incremental encoder signal Index positive 1 V pp analog 8 3 mA analog Channel C 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or PIN4 ENC C Incremental encoder signal Index negative 1 V pp analog 8 3 mA analog Channel A 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or PINS ENC A Incremental encoder signal A positive 1 V pp analog 8 3 mA analog Channel A 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or PIN6 ENC A Incremental encoder signal A negative 1 V pp analog 8 3 mA analog PIN7 Reference point for 5V encoder supply voltage Channel B 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or ENC B Incremental encoder signal B positive 1 V pp analog 8 3 mA analog AUX 5V encoder supply voltage see table 4 5 3 5V 200 mA Channel SIN 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or HALL 1 SIN Hall 1 positive Analog encoder Sin positive 1 V pp analog 8 3 mA analog Channel HALL 1 SIN 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or HALL 1 SIN Hall 1 negative Analog encoder Sin negative 1 V pp analog 8 3 mA analog Channel HALL 2 COS 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or HALL 2 COS Hall 2 positive Analog encoder Cos positive 1 V pp analog 8 3 mA analog Channel HALL 2 COS 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or HALL 2 COS Hall 2 negative Analog encoder Cos negative 1 V pp analog 8 3 mA analog Channel HALL 3 5 V digital or un 10 mA digital Hall 3 positive 1V ppanalog Channel HALL 3 5 V digital or T PIN 15 HALL 3 I 10 mA digital Hall 3 negative 1
75. p 162 6017 p 166 4025 p 170 4087 p 175 4158 p 197 5021 p 162 6018 p 167 4026 p 170 4090 p 167 4159 p 197 5022 p 162 6020 p 167 4027 p 170 4091 p 167 4160 p 197 5023 p 162 6021 p 167 4028 p 122 170 4092 p 167 4161 p 197 5024 p 162 6022 p 167 4030 p 170 4093 p 168 4162 p 197 5025 p 162 6023 p 167 4031 p 170 4100 p 194 4163 p 197 5026 p 162 6025 p 167 4032 p 170 4101 p 194 4164 p 197 5027 p 162 6026 p 167 4033 p 170 4102 p 194 4165 p 197 5028 p 162 6027 p 167 4034 p 170 4103 p 194 4166 p 197 5029 p 162 6028 p 167 4035 p 170 4104 p 194 4167 p 197 5030 p 162 6030 p 168 4036 p 170 4105 p 194 4168 p 197 5031 p 161 6031 p 168 4037 p 171 4106 p 194 4169 p 197 5032 p 162 6032 p 168 4038 p 171 4107 p 194 4200 p 187 5040 p 163 6033 p 168 4039 p 171 4108 p 195 4201 p 187 5041 p 163 6034 p 167 4040 p 171 4109 p 195 4202 p 189 5042 p 163 6035 p 168 4041 p 171 4110 p 195 4500 p 165 5043 p 163 6036 p 168 4045 p 171 4111 p 195 4501 p 165 5044 p 163 6037 p 168 4046 p 171 4112 p 195 4502 p 165 5045 p 163 6038 p 168 4047 p 171 4113 p 195 4503 p 165 5046 p 163 6039 p 168 4048 p 171 4114 p 195 4504 p 165 5047 p 163 6041 p 199 4049 p 171 4120 p 195 4505 p 172 5048 p 163 6042 p 200 4050 p 171 4121 p 195 4506 p 172 5049 p 163 6043 p 200 4051 p 171 4122 p 195 4507 p 172 5050 p 163 6044 p 200 4052 p 171 4123 p 195 4508 p 172 5051 p 162 6045 p 200 4053 p 171 4124 p 195 4509 p 172 5052 p 162 6046 p 200 4054 p 171 4129 p 194 4510 p 172 5060 p 163 6047 p 200 4055 p 171 4130 p 19
76. ppr value of the expanded input 1301 cnt dir N A RWSZ 0 0 1 DP V F B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted Selection of expansion encoder counting direction It allows to change sign of measured speed it is equivalent of swaping encoder channels AA lt gt BB STARTUP Startup config Encoders config Rep Sim encoder 1962 Rep Sim enc sel N A RWZ 0 0 1 DK V F Selection of the encoder to be repeated using the optional card EXP F2E 0 Repeat std enc repeat standard encoder 1 Repeat exp enc repeat expanded encoder 2 Simulate std simulate digital incremental encoder in case of SinCos or Resolver selections as feedback devices in Std enc type parameter 1952 Sim pulses N A RWZ 1024 1 Calc FK B Simulated encoder pulses per revolution ppr value factory setting 1024 ppr STARTUP Startup config Encoders config Index storing 9550 Index storing en WA RWSZ 0 0 3 DV F B Index storing function The encoder counts can be latched allowing the user to determine the position of the encoder relative to an absolute position 0 Off 1 Storing enabled enables the capturing of the encoder count as described by the setting of the control word The control word is the value of Int IS ctrl or the word selected by IS ctrl src 2 Control std enc it constantly reads all the generated pulses on the std encoder 3 Control exp enc it constantly reads all the generated pulses on the exp encoder 9551 Int IS ctr
77. ramp set 1 8051 acc end jerk rpm s RWS 1000 0 349 750 106 PP V F S B Acceleration end jerk set 1 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 139 IPA Description Unit Access Default Max Format Reg Mode 8057 MR1 dec ini jerk rpm s RWS 1000 750 106 V F S B Deceleration initial jerk set 1 8052 deceleration rpm s RWS 500 1 5 106 PP V F S B Deceleration ramp set 1 8053 MR1 dec end jerk rpm s RWS 1000 750 106 V F S B Deceleration end jerk set 1 8054 end decel rpm s RWS 1000 1 5 106 PP V F S B Final deceleration slope corresponding to removal of START command 9421 SlowDown dist nm RW 0 00 0 00 V F S B It allows to calculate the distance from running speed to approach speed if for running speed and approach speed Multispeed 1 and Multispeed 0 are used respectively SlowDown dist Calculate Executing Calculate using Enter key will be calculate the distance from running speed to approach speed Nore It is available only if IPA 1015 Travel units sel parameter is set to Millimeters TRAVEL Lift sequence 7100 Cont close delay ms RWS 200 65535 PP V F S B Output contactor close delay See Chapter 8 Lift Sequencies 7101 Brake open delay ms RWS 0 00 65535 PP V F S B See Chapter 8 Lift Sequencies 7102 Smooth start dly ms RWS 0 00 65535 PP V F S B See IPA 7110 into TRAVEL Speed profile menu 7103 Brake close dly
78. start speed is selected automatically after start command independently from multispeed value Duration of this special speed depends on Smooth start dly parameter If this parameter is zero Smooth start spd is not selected and multispeed values prevails Smooth start speed can be used to optimise feeling at starting in some types of installations 1 Lift start 1 Smooth start spd Smooth start dly Nore Smooth start dly can be set in TRAVEL Lift sequence menu 7060 Multi speed 0 rpm RWS 0 Calc Calc PV V F S B Speed 0 value 7061 Multi speed 1 rpm RWS 0 Calc Calc V F S B Speed 1 value 7062 Multi speed 2 rpm RWS 0 Calc Calc V F S B Speed 2 value 7063 Multi speed 3 rpm RWS 0 Calc Calc V F S B Speed 3 value 7064 Multi speed 4 rpm RWS 0 Calc Calc PP V F S B Speed 4 value 7065 Multi speed 5 rpm RWS 0 Calc Calc PP V F S B Speed 5 value 7066 Multi speed 6 rpm RWS 0 Calc Calc PP V F S B Speed 6 value 7067 Multi speed 7 rpm RWS 0 Calc Calc V F S B Speed 7 value 7134 linear speed mm s R Calc 0 0 FK V F S B TRAVEL Ramp profile The parameters unit is defined by IPA 1015 in STARTUP Startup config Mechanical data menu changing the 138 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode IPA 1015 setting from 0 Revolutions default to 1 Millimeters
79. still Start Switch on the output contactors and press Autophase Waiting start When the drive will display Waiting start give Enable and Start commands then wait until the end of phasing procedure Autotune End When the drive will display Autotune End close the brake remove the Enable and Start commands switch off the output contactors Press three times REGULATION PARAM Flux config Press v twice REGULATION PARAM SAVE PARAMETERS Press Qo to save the changes Chapter 7 Commissioning 113 Note 114 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 8 Lift Sequencies External contactor control It is possible to delegate output contactor control to external devices like PLC etc In this case it must be ensured that contactor is closed prior drive enable and is open only after drive disable signal has been issued Contactor mechanical opening and closing times must be taken into consideration External brake control Also brake control can be accomplished by an external means In this case brake can be opened only when Drive ready signal is asserted Brake must be closed after Start fwd rev command is removed and Ref is zero or Ref is zero dly signal programmed on digital output becomes active In FOC and BRS modes it is possible to refer to Ref is zero dly signal and adjust with para
80. the Digital output 7X refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 1 0 CONFIG Digital outputs Exp digital outs Exp dig out cfg 4070 DO OX inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4071 DO 1X inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4072 2 inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4073 DO inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4074 DO 4X inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4075 DO 5X inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4076 DO 6X inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4077 DO 7X inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 1 0 CONFIG Digital outputs Exp digital outs Exp dig out mon 4078 DOX 76543210 N A R 0 0 DP V F S B The digital output logical state of expansion board is displayed under each number ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 175 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min 1 0 CONFIG Digital outputs Exp dig out en Max Format Reg Mode 3903 Exp dig out en N A RWS 0 0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled It enables the expanded digital outputs 1 DV V F S B 1 0 CONFIG Bits gt Word The Word Composing Block Bits gt Word is useful to communicate for example between Drive and APC card it is possible to compose a word made of Drive read
81. the source Drive parameter has to be defined for the six Words Drv gt SBI word transmitting the data from the Drive to the SBI Six Words move the data from the SBI to the Drive SBI gt Drv word For more information to see the following documents for related information on SBI SBI PDP 33 Interface card Profibus DP instruction manual SBI DN 33 DeviceNet card instruction manual SBI COP CANopen card instruction manual COMMUNICATION RS485 105 Slave address N A Rws 1 0 255 DK V F S B It define the drive slave address 106 Slave res time N A RWS 1 0 255 DK V F S B It define the drive slave address time 104 Protocol type N A RWS 0 0 2 DK V F S B 0 Slink 4 1 Modbus 2 Jbus 3 ISO 1745 4 Hiperface protocol Used to communicate with Stegmann absolute encoders It defines the drive communication protocol type COMMUNICATION SBI config 8999 SBI enable N A RWS 0 0 1 DK V F S B 0 Disabled 1 Enabled It allows to enable SBI Field Bus option cards SAVE PARAMETERS command and drive recycle power are required ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 191 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode COMMUNICATION SBI monitor 8998 Last SBI error N A R 0 0 2 DP V F S B It defines the last found error 0 OK no error 1 Hardware fault 2 Bus Loss COMMUNICATION Drv gt SBI word COMMUNICATION Drv gt SBI word Drv
82. to set MRO deceleration parameter press to confirm MRO dec end jerk 1000 rpm s de Press to set MRO dec end jerk parameter press to confirm MRO end decel 1000 rpm s ie Press to set MRO end decel parameter press to confirm Chapter 7 Commissioning 111 TRAVEL Ramp profile Press 9 times to open the saving procedure TRAVEL SAVE PARAMETERS Press Qo to execute the procedure Bus Please wait TRAVEL SAVE PARAMETERS lt R 0 S 0 MONITOR Now the drive is set with commands for standard sequence R 0 S 0 SERVICE Encoder phasing Qo Autophase SERVICE Insert password Required only if piss encoder motor are not aligned in Insert password factory 00000 the last digit will blinking Insert password 12345 le Insert the 12345 password and press Insert password 00000 Press o twice R 0 S 0 SERVICE Press four times VY 112 e Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual V Save all changes ARTDrivel Instruction Manual R 0 S 0 REGULATION PARAM Press v four times REGULATION PARAM Flux config Flux config Magnetiz config oio Now it is possible to select two different modes of phasing procedure rotation brake opened or still brake closed Autophase rot Start 0 Autophase
83. tran 21 thr 142 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode Possible configuration Spd 0 enable Disable also parameters 32 are set Gains 1 are used for high speed running Gains 2 are used for middle accel decel speed Gains 3 are used for low speed starting stopping Gain 4 SGP tran 32 band SGP tran 21 band Spd gain Spd P2gain Spd P1 gain Pease cade pach eases Spd I3 gain Spd 12 gain L a i J3 Spd gain meeehbeeeeebesem Je J2 2Bb B J 1 j 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i i 1 1 gt Speed ref 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Speedref SGP tran 32 thr SGP tran 21 thr Possible configuration Spd 0 enable Enable as spd 0 only parameters 21 are set Gains 1 are used for high speed running Gains 2 are used for middle accel decel speed Gains 0 are used for low speed starting stopping Gain 4 SGP tran 21 band Spd 0 P gain Spd P2 gain 1 1 1 1 1 Spd P1 gain 3 1 1 gt Speed ref 1 Spd 01 gain Spd 12 gain Spd 11 gain 4 j T Speedref 1 Spd 0 ref thr EN SGP tran 21 thr ARTDrivel Instructi
84. xl base value p 153 gain p 153 xP base value p 153 xP gain p 153 A Frequency p 122 Full scale speed p 129 G Gain monitor p 157 Gain transitions p 157 Gearbox inertia p 130 Gearbox ratio p 129 Gen Hi ref p 158 Gen Low ref p 158 Gen output p 158 Gen Period p 158 GF activity p 183 GFthreshold p 183 Ground fault p 183 H Heatsink S OT p 184 HT sensor temp p 123 HTS activity p 184 HTS hold off p 184 HTS restart p 184 HTS restart time p 184 Hw fault p 189 Hw fault mon p 189 1 0 CONFIG p 159 1 0 status p 122 IA sensor temp p 123 IAS activity p 185 IAS hold off p 185 IAS restart p 185 IAS restart time p 185 IGBT desaturat p 183 Import recipe p 137 In use values p 153 Index storing p 133 Index storing en p 133 Inertia comp p 147 Inertia comp en p 147 Inertia comp flt p 147 Inertia comp mon p 147 Inst overcurrent p 183 Int Drv SBI WO p 192 Int Drv SBI W1 p 192 Int Drv SBI W2 p 192 Int Drv SBIW3 p 192 Int Drv SBI W4 p 192 Int Drv SBIW5 p 192 Int DrvDGFC A WO p 196 Int DrvDGFC A W1 p 196 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Int DrvDGFC A W2 Int DrvDGFC A W3 Int DrvDGFC A W4 Int DrvDGFC A W5 Int DrvDGFC A W6 Int DrvDGFC A W7 Int DrvDGFC A W8 Int DrvDGFC A W9 Int DrvDGFC S WO Int DrvDGFC S W1 Int DrvDGFC S W2 Int DrvDGFC S W3 p 195 Int DrvDGFC S W4 p 195 Int flx maxlim p 156 Int Inertia p 147 Int IS p 133 Int Outvit lim p 156 Int Pre torque p 146 Int ramp ref 1 p 149 Int r
85. 0 above the rated current of the frequency Drive in order to take into account additional losses due to PWM waveform Table 4 8 2 1 Recommended Output Chokes 1007 1015 1022 1030 2040 LU3 005 S7FG3 2055 2075 LU3 011 S7FG4 3110 3150 LU3 015 S7FM2 LU3 003 S7FG2 4185 4221 LU3 022 S7FH3 4300 4301 LU3 030 S7FH4 4370 4371 LU3 037 57 5 5450 LU3 055 S7FH6 5550 SD LU3 090 S7FH7 7900 71100 71320 LU3 160 S7FH8 81600 TAVy4150 When the drive is operated at the rated current and at 50 Hz the output chokes cause a voltage drop of approx 2 of the output voltage 4 8 3 Interference Suppression Filters The inverters of AVy series must be equipped with an external EMI filter in order to reduce the radiofrequency emissions on to the mains line The filter selection is depending on the drive size and the installation environment For this purpose see the EMC Guidelines instruction book In the Guide it is also indicated how to install the cabinet connection of filter and mains reactors cable shield groundig etc in order to make it EMC compliant according the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC The document describes the present situation concerning the EMC standards and the compliance tests made on the Gefran Siei drives For the use of output sinusoidal filters please contact the factory Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 57 4 9 Braking Units In oversynchronous or regenerative operation the frequency con
86. 18 160 kW 200 Hp 19 250 kW 300 Hp 20 315 kW 450 Hp 21 18 5kW 22 5 Hp 300 Drive type N A R 288 0 0 DK V F S B 288 460V default settings for AVy AC AC4 289 460V default settings for AVy BR BR4 34 400V default settings for AVy AC AC4 35 400V default settings for AVy BR BR4 124 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 115 Drive name N A RWS 0 00 0 00 0 00 FK V F S B ACDRV asynchronous firmware ACDRVM brushless drive firmware 810 Actual setup N A R 0 0 0 DK V F S B Setup motor file in use reserved 107 Software version Drive software version factory installed example V 3 0 0 110 Software type N A R DrvVer 0 0 DV V F S B Software type factory use 111 Software status N A R DrvVer 0 0 DV V F S B Software state factory use 99 Life time hrs R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV V F S B Drive life time accumulated with power on 98 Sys time ddmmyy h m s R 0 00 000 000 PV V F S B Time and date setting from PC configurator or serial communications Clock is active only when the Drive is powered on Nore new regulation card the variable takes value 00 00 00 time 010170 date MONITOR Alarm log This function provides a list of last 30 drive trips or various system error messages Together with cause indications also time and data infornations is provided Alarm log message is referred to Sys time dd mm yy va
87. 2 V2 W2 C D PE Table 4 2 1 3 Maximum Cable Cross Section for Power Terminals ype Tuus Tess 72 72s o2 T3506 T ais aan ET TT AWG 14 12 10 8 6 4 U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 C D 10 16 25 2 4 8 terminal OTD UE 2 3 Nm 0 5 to 0 6 12to 15 lbf 4 4 to 5 3 10 6 to 13 2 17 7 26 5 12 10 8 6 10 8 0 006 0 012 0 016 0 009 0 016 5 152 Tightening torque 14 BRI terminals 2 0 003 0 5 to 0 6 Tightening torque 4j to 53 ANG E T PE1 PE2 terminals mm 2 4 8 10 16 16 sq in 0 003 0 006 0 012 0 016 0 025 0 025 Tightening torque ULVLWLU2 V2 W2 C D terminals Tightening torque BRI terminals Tightening torque Tightening torque EM FEXT terminals Nore Nm 0 5 to 0 6 1 2to1 5 in 44 to 53 5550 6750 4370 4371 5450 2 35 5 70 7900 2 m 2 0 4f 300 350 5 0 0 10 6 to 13 2 71100 71320 81600 4xAWG2 4x35 0 054 0 078 0 109 12 9 150 185 0 147 0 233 0 287 0 006x0 054 10 30 106 2 88 5 265 5 terminals not available E E 6 16 sq in 0 025 Nm 3 Gb in 26 5 AWG mm 2 30 0 078 4 35 4 0 4 2 3 17 7 26 5 kemils I LLL Tightening t ening torque g g torq bf in tadl4040L The grounding conductor of the motor cable may conduc
88. 32 Std dig inp cfg p 169 Std dig inp mon p 170 Std dig out cfg p 174 Std dig out mon p 174 Std dig out src p 173 Std enc cnt dir p 132 Std enc position p 123 Std enc pulses p 132 Std enc supply p 132 Std enc type p 131 Std sin enc mod p 123 Std sin enc Vp p 132 Switching freq p 126 Sys time ddmmyy p 125 224 Chapter 12 Parameters Index T T setpoint cfg p 154 T setpoint mon p 154 T setpoint src p 154 Tcurr lim p 154 Tcurr lim p 155 Tcurr lim sel p 154 Tcurr lim state p 155 Term Start src p 159 Term Stop src p 159 Term StrStp src p 159 Test gen cfg p 158 Test gen mode p 158 Test gen mon p 158 Test generator p 157 Torque config p 154 Torque constant p 127 Torque curr p 123 Torque curr ref p 123 Torque ref p 154 Torque ref 2 mon p 154 Torque ref 2 src p 154 TRAVEL p 138 Travel units sel p 129 Trq curr lim cfg p 154 Trq curr lim mon p 155 Trq curr lim src p 154 U Undervoltage p 182 UV repetitive p 189 UV restart p 182 UV restart time p 182 UV select src p 182 UVR attempts p 189 UVR delay p 189 V ILim I gain p 152 V ILim P gain p 152 V reg param p 152 V f config p 135 V f frequency p 135 V f voltage p 135 Vit regulator p 153 VItl base value p 154 gain p 153 VItP base value p 154 VItP gain p 153 Voltage boost p 152 W WO comp out p 177 WO decomp inp p 179 WO decomp mon p 179 WO decomp src p 179 W1 comp out p 179 W1 decomp inp p 180 W1 decomp mon p 180 W1 decomp src p 180 Weight
89. 3531 Slip comp rpm RWS Calc 0 00 Calc PV Compensation of speed drop due to load Initialized by autotune procedure When Slip comp mode Encoder it acts as a limit on the amount of speed correction obtained from encoder feedback In general parameter must be increased to about 4 times of rated motor slip Low values of Slip comp parameter may cause instability 3541 Slip comp filter sec RWS 0 50 Calc 10 PP Slip compensation filter 3411 Slip comp mode N A RWS 0 0 2 DP 0 Normal Standard slip compensation using load current 1 Encoder Slip compensation using encoder feedback in closed loop speed control see IPA 3531 2 Lift Slip compensation using load current suitable for lift application from software rel 3 500 3412 Slip P gain RWS 2 0 0 100 PP Proportional gain of slip regulator It must be adjusted according to actual load conditions inertia In general if there are oscillations the proportional gain must be increased 3413 Slip I gain RWS 0 5 0 100 PP Integral gain of slip regulator It must be adjusted according to actual load conditions inertia In general if there are oscillations the integral gain must be reduced 3585 Antioscill gain RWS 0 0 100 PP It allows to damp the current oscillations in the motor which could be developed in the middle range of the rated speed 3520 V fILim P gain rnm A RWS Calc PP V Proportional gain of the pseudo current loop regulator in V f mode 3530 V
90. 39 Digitalinput 7 amp qualifier Digital input 7 parameter must be set as not used 6 4mA 30V 41 Dita output Programmable output Default setting DRIVE READY Digital output uu 30V 40mA 42 3 Programmable output Default setting SPEED IS 0 46 Supply D Supply input for digital outputs on terminals 41 42 Ref point term 16 30V 80mA RIK 78 Motor Motor sensing for overtemperature cutoff R1k if used 1 5mA 79 S Strip X2 Function Max 80 250V AC Digital output 0 Potential free relay contact programmable output 1A 82 Relay Default DRIVE OK 83 Digital output 1 Potential free relay contact programmable output 250V AC prog Relay Default BRAKE CONT MON 1A 85 42 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure ARTDriveL Instruction Manua 4 4 Potentials of the Control Section The potentials of the regulation section are isolated and can be disconnected via jumpers from ground The connections between each potential are shown in Figure 4 4 1 The analog inputs are designed as differential amplifiers The digital inputs are optocoupled with the control circuit The digital inputs have terminal 16 as reference point The analog outputs are not designed as differential amplifiers and have a common reference point terminal 22 The analog outputs and the 10V reference point have same potential terminal 9 and 22 The digital outputs are optocoupled with the control circuit
91. 3X An out 3X mon 6033 An out mon cnt R 0 00 32768 32676 PP V F S B Analog output 3X count value displaying Analog outputs Exp analog outs Analog output 4X An out 4X src 4093 An out 4X src N A RWS 4000 List 2 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the selected signal to the Analog output 4X refer to signals List 2 of Pick List manual Analog outputs Exp analog outs Analog output 4X An out 4X cfg 6039 An out 4x type N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 0 20 mA 1 4 20 mA It allows to select the Analog output 4X type EXP D20A6 optional card is required 6037 An out 4X scale N A RWS 1 10 10 PP V F S B Scale or multiplicative factor of Analog output 4X 6035 An out 4X hi lim cnt RWS 16383 0 32767 PP V F S B Analog output 4X count value aimed at obtaining 10V Value must be higher than zero 6036 An out 4X lo lim cnt RWS 16384 32768 0 PP V F S B Analog output 4X count value aimed at obtaining 10V Value must be higher than zero Analog outputs Exp analog outs Analog output 4X An out 4X mon 6038 An out 4X mon cnt R 0 00 32768 32676 PP V F S B Analog output 4X count value displaying Analog outputs Exp analog outs Exp ana out en 3901 Exp ana out en WA RWS 0 0 1 DV V F S B 0 Disabled 1 Enabled It enables the expanded analog outputs 168 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format
92. 4 Torque Specifications sss 27 Table 2 3 6 2 Speed Reference Feedback Resolution and Maximum Limits sss 27 Table 2 3 6 3 Speed Regulator Bandwidth sisse tente Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation Guidelines 3 1 Dimensions and Mounting Methods Figure 3 1 1 Drive Dimensions Sizes 1007 3150 28 Figure 3 1 2 Mounting Methods Sizes 1007 3150 25 28 Table 3 1 1 Drive Dimensions and Weights Sizes 1007 3150 MEET 29 Figure 3 1 3 Drive Dimensions Sizes 4220 81600 29 Figure 3 1 4 Mounting Methods Sizes 4220 81600 30 Table 3 1 2 Drive Dimensions and Weights Sizes 4220 81600 30 Fig re 3 1 5 Keypad Positioning etr tente i e edd lenses b deiode seda 30 3 2 Watts Loss Heat Dissipation Internal Fans and Minimum Cabinet Opening Suggested for the Table 3 2 1 Heat Dissipation and Required Air Flow Table 3 2 2 Minimum Cabinet Opening Suggested for the Cooling 3 2 1 Cooling Fans Power Supply nn rhe eee ed d he Figure 3 2 1 UL Type Fans Connections on AVy7900 AVy71100 and AVy71320 Sizes Figure 3 2 2 UL Type Fans Connections on AVy6750 and AVy81600 Sizes Fi
93. 5 4511 p 172 5061 p 164 6048 p 200 4056 p 171 4131 p 195 4512 p 172 5062 p 164 6049 p 199 4057 p 122 171 4132 p 195 4513 p 172 5063 p 164 6050 p 199 4060 p 174 4133 p 195 4514 p 172 5064 p 164 6051 p 199 4061 p 174 4134 p 196 4515 p 172 5065 p 164 6056 p 201 4062 p 174 4135 p 196 4516 p 172 5066 p 164 6057 p 201 4063 p 174 4136 p 196 4517 p 172 5067 p 164 6058 p 201 4064 p 122 174 4137 p 196 4518 p 172 5068 p 164 6059 p 201 4065 p 173 4138 p 196 4519 p 172 5069 p 163 6060 p 201 4066 p 174 4139 p 196 4520 p 172 5080 p 164 6061 p 201 4067 p 174 4140 p 196 4521 p 172 5081 p 165 6062 p 201 4068 p 174 4141 p 196 4522 p 172 5082 p 164 6063 p 201 4070 p 175 4142 p 196 4523 p 172 5083 p 164 6064 p 200 4071 p 175 4143 p 196 4524 p 172 5084 p 165 6065 p 200 4072 p 175 4144 p 196 5000 p 160 5085 p 164 6066 p 200 4073 p 175 4145 p 196 5001 p 161 5086 p 164 6070 p 203 4074 p 175 4146 p 196 5002 p 161 5087 p 165 6071 p 203 4075 p 175 4147 p 196 5003 p 161 5088 p 165 6072 p 203 4076 p 175 4148 p 196 5004 p 161 5089 p 164 6073 p 203 4077 p 175 4149 p 196 5005 p 161 530 p 153 6074 p 203 4078 p 122 175 4150 p 197 5006 p 161 540 p 153 6075 p 203 4080 p 174 4151 p 197 5007 p 161 6010 p 166 6076 p 203 4081 p 174 4152 p 197 5008 p 161 6011 p 166 6077 p 203 4082 p 174 4153 p 197 5009 p 161 6012 p 166 6078 p 203 4083 p 174 4154 p 197 5010 p 161 6013 p 166 6079 p 203 218 Chapter 12 Parameters Index ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 6080 p 203 7134 p 138 9031 p 193 910
94. 5 Fast stop 6 Curr limstp Regulation card Sensor Over Temperature activity 9058 RGS restart N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 off 1 on Regulation card Sensor Over Temperature restart 9059 RGS restart time ms RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V F S B Regulation card Sensor Over Temperature restart time 9605 RGS hold off ms RWS 10000 0 30000 PP V F S B Regulation card Sensor Over Temperature hold off ALARM CONFIG Intake air S OT Intake air Sensor Over Temperature only for model AVyL 4185 and over 9087 IAS activity N A RWS 3 2 6 DP V F S B 2 Warning 3 Disable drive 4 Stop 5 Fast stop 6 Curr limstp Intake air Sensor Over Temperature activity 9088 TAS restart NA RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 off 1 on Intake air Sensor Over Temperature restart 9089 IAS restart time ms RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V F S B Intake air Sensor Over Temperature restart time 9606 IAS hold off ms RWS 10000 0 30000 PP V F S B Intake air Sensor Over Temperature hold off ALARM CONFIG Contact feedback Ittrips when the contact feedback signal is not detected Can be used to monitor the status of output contactor and give alarm if command and feedback don t match OUTPUT CONTACTOR Digital output Digital input set as RUN cont mon CNT feedback src set as Digital input X ft ttf K1M MAIN CONTACTS 7141 feedback src N A RWS 7122 List3 PIN V F S B IPA 7122 RUN cont mon Default It allows to select
95. 50 60Hz 3Ph_Zmin 1 28 2A 400Vac 24 5AQ480Vac With line choke Out 0 400Vac 0 500Hz 3Ph 20HP 460Vac 15kW 400Vac 33A 400V Cont Serv 26 94 480V LISTED INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT 31KF Inverter model S N Serial number Inp Power supply voltage range frequency and AC Input current Out Output voltage Output frequency Output power and current Figure 2 1 3 2 Firmware amp Card revision level nameplate Firmware HWrelease S N 0162330 Prod Release D F S BU SWCFG CONF 1 000 O A 1 000 01 Figure 2 1 3 3 Nameplates position 18 Chapter 2 Inspection procedures Components Identification and Std Specs ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 2 2 Component Identification An ARTDriveL converts the constant voltage and frequency of a three phase power supply into a direct voltage and then converts this direct voltage into anew three phase power supply with a variable voltage and frequency This variable three phase power supply can be used for infinitely variable adjustment of the speed of three phase asynchronous and synchronous motors Figure 2 2 1 Basic Setup of Frequency Inverter 1 AC Input supply voltage 2 AC Mains choke See section 4 8 1 3 Three phase rectifier bridge Converts the alternating current into direct current using a three phase full wave bridge 4 DC intermediate circuit With charging r
96. 62 An inp 2 dst p 165 An inp 2 filter p 162 An inp 2 gain p 162 An inp 2 hi lim p 162 An inp 2 lo lim p 162 An inp 2 mon p 162 An inp 2 offset p 162 An inp 2 output p 162 An inp 2 scale p 162 An inp 2 src p 161 An inp 2 thr p 162 An inp 2 type p 162 An inp 2X thr p 165 An inp 2X cfg p 164 An inp 2X dst p 165 An inp 2X gain p 165 An inp 2X hi lim p 164 An inp 2X lo lim p 164 An inp 2X mon p 165 An inp 2X offset p 165 An inp 2X output p 165 An inp 2X scale p 164 An inp 2X src p 164 An inp 2X thr p 164 An inp 2X type p 164 An inp 3 lt thr p 163 An inp 3 cfg p 163 An inp 3 dst p 165 An inp 3 filter p 163 An inp 3 gain p 163 An inp 3 hi lim p 163 An inp lo lim p 163 An inp 3 mon p 163 An inp 3 offset p 163 An inp 3 output p 163 An inp 3 scale p 163 An inp 3 src p 162 220 Chapter 12 Parameters Index An inp 3 thr p 163 An inp 3 type p 163 An out 1 cfg p 166 An out 1 hi lim p 166 An out 1 lo lim p 166 An out 1 mon p 166 An out 1 scale p 166 An out 1 sgn src p 166 An out 1 src p 166 An out 1X cfg p 167 An out 1X hi lim p 167 An out 1X lo lim p 167 An out 1X mon p 167 An out 1X scale p 167 An out 1X src p 167 An out 2 cfg p 166 An out 2 hi lim p 166 An out 2 lo lim p 166 An out 2 mon p 167 An out 2 scale p 166 An out 2 sgn src p 166 An out 2 src p 166 An out 2X cfg p 167 An out 2X hi lim p 167 An out 2X lo lim p 167 An out 2X mon p 167 An out 2X scale p 167 An out 2X src p 167 An out 3X cfg p 1
97. 62 0 0 28 112 1500 028 112 1500 0 58 1 54 4500 0 62 1 88 4500 0 72 2 83 4500 5450 490 0 87 424 3 4500 0 87 424 3 4500 0 61 5 6 0 61 5 6 0 91 8 4 12 1 130 128 130 128 SMPS Switched Mode Power Supply 0 0 21 1 1 1 avy4220L ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 63 Figure 4 10 1 Buffering the Regulator Supply by Means of Additional Intermediate Circuit Capacitors 1 450 Voc C2x 450 Voc Nore When connecting the intermediate circuit terminals C and D the AC Input side must be protected with superfast semiconductor fuses Formula for calculating the size of the external capacitors 2 P pure 10 Ca s Ce d U sur Win Anis Cae uF Pups W U pe 7 400 V at U 400 V tput s U pe 460 V at U 460 V Upute V U nin 250 V Calculation example An AVy4220 drive is operated with an AC Input supply U 400 V A voltage failure buffer is required for max 1 5 s Pas 70W fa d U 400V 250V Ca 1800 pF 2 70W 1 58 10uF F 1800 2154 uF 1800 uF 354uF 400 V 2 250 V 2 64 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 4 11 Discharge Time of the DC Link Table 4 11 1 DC Link Discharge Time mE MES irr EET sm Lo 205 120 210 mem This is the minimum time that must be elapsed when an
98. 67 An out 3X hi lim p 168 An out lo lim p 168 An out 3X mon p 168 An out 3X scale p 168 An out 3X src p 167 An out type p 167 An out 4X cfg p 168 An out 4X hi lim p 168 An out 4X lo lim p 168 An out 4X mon p 168 An out 4X scale p 168 An out 4X src p 168 An out 4x type p 168 Analog inputs p 160 Analog outputs p 165 Antioscill gain p 152 APPL CARD CONFIG p 194 Appl card fault p 187 Autotune p 128 Available Outvit p 156 BO WO decomp p 179 BO W1 decomp p 180 B1 WO decomp p 179 B1 W1 decomp p 180 B10 WO decomp p 180 B10 W1 decomp p 181 B11 WO decomp p 180 B11 W1 decomp p 181 B12 WO decomp p 180 B12 W1 decomp p 181 B13 WO decomp p 180 B13 W1 decomp p 181 B14 WO decomp p 180 B14 W1 decomp p 181 B15 WO decomp p 180 B15 W1 decomp p 181 B2 WO decomp p 179 B2 W1 decomp p 180 B3 WO decomp p 180 B3 W1 decomp p 180 B4 WO decomp p 180 B4 W1 decomp p 181 B5 WO decomp p 180 B5 W1 decomp p 181 B6 WO decomp p 180 B6 W1 decomp p 181 B7 WO decomp p 180 B7 W1 decomp p 181 B8 WO decomp p 180 B8 W1 decomp p 181 B9 WO decomp p 180 B9 W1 decomp p 181 Bandwidth p 135 Base values p 152 153 154 Bits 2 Word p 176 Bits Word Bits gt Word0 mon p 177 Bits Word Bits gt Word0 src p 176 Bits gt Word Bits gt Word1 mon p 179 Brake close dly p 140 Brake feedback p 186 Brake open delay p 140 Brake open src p 142 BRK activity p 186 BRK feedback src p 186 BRK hold off p 186 BRK RUN hold off p 186 BU control p 136
99. 9 SGP tran32 band RWS 0 0 100 PP F S B See Possible Default configuration figures on TRAVEL Speed reg gains menu TRAVEL Pre torque Pre torque function helps to ensure smooth starting without initial jerk This is achieved by setting the torque prior to open the brake to a value that corresponds to the load Pre torque value applied to the motor as well as direction of applied torque can be provided by mounting load cell on the lift car Load cell signal is acquired through analog input and scaled appropriately if pre torque function is used If load cell is not available it is possible to work with fixed value of torque and provide only torque direction In this case fixed value is optimized only for one load condition Speed gt gt Torque ref Pre torque gain PRE TORQUE BLOCK Torque ref 2 src Null Constant Pre torque src 1 i Pre torque out H One Ramp Pre torque sign src 9431 Int Pre torque RWS 0 0 100 PV F S B Internal fixed motor pre torque value 9432 Pre torque time sec RWS 1 0 0 01 5 PP F S B Pre torque duration in case that IPA 9439 is selected as ramp 146 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 9438 Pre torque gain RWS 1 0 0 4 0 PP F S B Gain factor of the Pre torque function to scale value from load sensor Pre torque gain value is automatically calculated after mechanica
100. 9 p 202 9369 p 181 6081 p 203 7135 p 186 9032 p 193 9110 p 202 9370 p 181 6082 p 204 7136 p 186 9033 p 193 9111 p 202 9371 p 181 6083 p 204 7137 p 187 9034 p 193 9112 p 202 9372 p 181 6084 p 204 7138 p 141 9035 p 193 9113 p 202 9373 p 181 6085 p 204 7141 p 185 9040 p 188 9114 p 202 9374 p 181 670 p 126 127 7142 p 186 9041 p 188 9115 p 202 9375 p 181 680 p 126 7143 p 141 9042 p 188 9116 p 202 9376 p 181 690 p 126 127 7144 p 187 9043 p 189 9117 p 202 9377 p 181 700 p 127 7145 p 186 9044 p 189 9118 p 202 9378 p 181 7029 p 149 720 p 127 9046 p 183 9119 p 202 9405 p 122 7030 p 149 730 p 127 9047 p 183 9120 p 202 9410 p 131 7031 p 149 775 p 127 9049 p 187 9121 p 202 9411 p 130 7032 p 149 8021 p 149 9050 p 182 9122 p 202 9412 p 130 7033 p 149 8022 p 150 9051 p 182 9123 p 202 9417 p 130 7034 p 149 8031 p 149 9052 p 183 9124 p 202 9419 p 130 7035 p 149 8040 p 139 9053 p 183 9125 p 202 9420 p 130 7036 p 149 8041 p 139 9054 p 184 9126 p 203 9421 p 140 7037 p 149 8042 p 139 9055 p 184 9127 p 203 9431 p 146 7038 p 149 8043 p 139 9056 p 184 9128 p 203 9432 p 146 7039 p 149 8044 p 139 9057 p 185 9129 p 203 9434 p 147 7040 p 150 8046 p 139 9058 p 185 9130 p 203 9435 p 147 7041 p 150 8047 p 139 9059 p 185 9131 p 203 9438 p 147 7045 p 150 8050 p 139 9060 p 183 9210 p 159 9439 p 147 7046 p 151 8051 p 139 9061 p 184 9211 p 159 9550 p 133 7050 p 150 8052 p 140 9062 p 184 9220 p 188 9551 p 133 7051 p 150 8053 p 140 9063 p 183 9221 p 188 9553 p 123 7053 p 150 8054 p 140
101. AVEL Speed profile TRAVEL Ramp profile 96 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDriveL Instruction Manual N meo end decel WY ARTDrivel Instruction Manual MRO acc ini jerk 1000 rpm s Press to set MRO acc ini jerk parameter press to confirm MRO acceleration 500 rpm s le Press to set MRO acceleration parameter press to confirm MRO acc end jerk 1000 rpm s de Press to set MRO acc end jerk parameter press to confirm MRO dec ini jerk 1000 rpm s de Press to set MRO dec ini jerk parameter press to confirm MRO deceleration 500 rpm s de Press to set MRO deceleration parameter press to confirm MRO dec end jerk 1000 rpm s de Press to set MRO dec end jerk parameter press to confirm MRO end decel 1000 rpm s je Press to set MRO end decel parameter press to confirm TRAVEL Ramp profile i Press 9 times to open the saving procedure TRAVEL SAVE PARAMETERS Chapter 7 Commissioning 97 Press to execute the procedure Busy Please wait to TRAVEL SAVE PARAMETERS Press o 0 S 0 MONITOR Now the drive is set with commands for standard sequence 98 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 7 2 Commissioning for AVy BR BR4 Brushless Motors Commissioning Set up Procedure Function Description Set Drive data Drive Data parameters
102. AVy Drive is disconnected from the AC Input before an operator may service parts inside the drive to avoid electric shock hazard Coworrion The value consider the time to turn off for a drive supplied at 480Vac 10 without any options the charge for the switching supply is the regulation card the keypad and the 24Vdc fans if mounted The drive is disabled This represents the worst case condition ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 65 Note 66 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 5 Serial Interface Description The RS 485 serial interface enables data transfer via a loop made of two symmetrical twisted conductors with a common shield The maximum transmission distance is 1200 m 3936 feet with a transfer rate of up to 38 400 KBaud The transmission is carried out via a differential signal RS 485 interfaces are bus compatible in half duplex mode i e sending and receiving take place in sequence Up to 31 ARTDriveL devices up to 128 address selectable can be networked together via the RS 485 interface Address setting is carried out via the Slave address parameter Further information concerning the parameters to be transfered their type and value range is given in paragraph 9 2 COMMUNICATION RS 485 Figure 5 1 RS485 Serial Interface
103. Analog outputs 0 10V 5 mA max per output Digital inputs 0 15 30V 3 2 6 4 mA 5 mA 24 V Digital outputs Supply 15 35 V Signals 15 35 V 40 mA max per output Int voltage supply Load capacity 5 V 160 mA Plug connector 10 V 10 mA Terminal 7 10 V 10 mA Terminal 8 24 V 120 mA Terminal 19 Tolerance 10V x 390 10V x 3959 24V 20 30 V not stabilized XE for digital encoder PIN 7 9 The tolerance between positive and negative amplitudes is 0 5 2 3 6 Accuracy Table 2 3 6 1 Maximum Minimum Output Frequency Output frequency Hz Maximum Minimum a Resolution Switching frequency KHz 4 8 16 Regulation mode Fs zoo 20 200 200 os os Brushless 200 200 400 400 0 a 1 5 Rated motor torque capability 26 Chapter 2 Inspection procedures Components Identification and Std Specs ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Table 2 3 6 2 Speed Reference Feedback Resolution and Maximum Limits d feedback resolution rpm Regulation mode tion Spee ack resolution rpm FSS max Limit speed rpm Enc Sin Enc Dig Fmode Enc Dig Fpmode SinCos Res Value rpm rpm Higher from Higher from Field oriented 60000 4096 ppr 60000 40 ppr SpdD ref res SpdD ref res k SpdD rel res Sensorless vect 0 55 Highest value from 0 3 SpdD ref res b V f control N A Higher value of either 60000 Highest value of 4096 ppr or Sp
104. Aqgpizs EwPi7S 25000 raris 6750 25000 S00 f1 110 250A 660V Ml fl 250A 660V Pos 7900 25000 _ F4G28 71100 25000 25000 S2iif1 110 400A 660V or M2 f1 400A 660V F4G34 A70P400 57648 57648 57651 57688 57654 57655 57656 57657 57660 57662 Fuse manufacturers Type GRD2 E27 GRD3 E33 M blade fuses TADL4120 714 14 x 51 mm 722 22 x 58 mm S Jean Miiller Eltville Gould Shawmut FWP Bussmann Norte The technical data of the fuses e g dimensions weights heat dissipation auxiliary contactors are found in the manufacturers data sheets 54 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 4 7 2 External Fuses for the Power Section DC Input Side Use the following fuses when a SR 32 Line Regen is used see SR 32 instruction book for more details Table 4 7 2 1 External Fuses Type for DC Input Side Fuse manufacturers Type Z14 222 S00 S1 FWP Nore USA Drive type 1007 1015 ZI4GRIO 70 10 FWP10A14F 1022 Z14GR16 A70P20 FWP20A14F 1050 an Z14GR32 70 25 1 FWP25A14F 2055 2075 Z14GRS50 70 50 FWP50B 3110 Z22GR63 ATOP60 4 FWP60B 4185 4220 4221 4300 S00 F1 80 100A 660V A70P100 FWP100 4301 4370 S00 F1 80 125A 660V 70 150 FWP150 4371 5450 S00 F1 80 160A 660V 70 175 FWP175 7900 S1 F1 110 315A 660
105. CA W src 4130 DGFC A WOsrc N A RWS IPA4140 List 30 PIN V F S B IPA 4140 Int DrvDGFC A WO Default It allows to select the origin of Asynchronous Word 0 to be transmitted from Drive to DGFC card refer to signals List 30 of Pick List manual 4131 Drv DGFC A Wisrc N A RWS IPA4141 List 30 PIN V F S B IPA 4141 Int DrvDGFC A W1 Default It allows to select the origin of Asynchronous Word 1 to be transmitted from Drive to DGFC card refer to signals List 30 of Pick List manual 4132 DGFC A W2src N A RWS IPA4142 List 30 PIN V F S B IPA 4142 Int DrvDGFC A W2 Default It allows to select the origin of Asynchronous Word 2 to be transmitted from Drive to DGFC card refer to signals List 30 of Pick List manual 4133 DGFC A W3src N A RWS IPA4143 List 30 PIN V F S B IPA 4143 Int DrvDGFC A W3 Default It allows to select the origin of Asynchronous Word 3 to be transmitted from Drive to DGFC card refer to signals List 30 of Pick List manual ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 195 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 4134 DGFC A W4src N A RWS IPA 4144 List 30 PIN V F S B IPA 4144 Int DrvDGFC A W4 Default It allows to select the origin of Asynchronous Word 4 to be transmitted from Drive to DGFC card refer to signals List 30 of Pick List manual 4135 Drv DGFC A Wbsrc N A RWS 4145 List 30 PIN V F S B IPA 4145 Int DrvDGFC A W5 Default I
106. Cards 4 5 OT Feet Digital input 2 Digital input 3 Fer eer i K Digital input 4 Analog 21 output 1 a 22 Analog output 2 5 S35 7 9 8 Digital output 1 83 85 Digital output 0 80 82 wi TA OV 24V Digital input 5 i a KI ini Digital output 21 d 4 5 8 m 5 31 moa Digital input 6 i i i 4 i 23 Digital input 7 Digital output 3i 42 OV 24V i LOAD i i 24V 24V i i 2 0 24 V HN 19 Internal power suppl i from Bower Card H i i 28 amp W424 V OV 2AV i 78 i 8 i ik Over Temperature BU 26 79 2 Motor T 1 i i i i o i Note Combination 44 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure N inputs PNP outputs and viceversa is not permitted ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 4 5 Encoders Several types of encoders may be connected to the XE connector high density 15 pole socket fitted on device see the table 4 5 2 for the jumper settings e AVy AC ACA DE digital incremental encoder with A A B B C C traces SE sinusoidal incremental encoder with A A B B C C traces e AVy BR BR4 SEHS sinusoidal incremental encoder with A A B B C C traces and three digital Hall sensor absolute position traces for initial synchronization factory setting SESC sinusoidal incremental encode
107. DS or CDM BDM should comply with IEC 1800 3 EN 61800 3 The manufacturer of the PDS or CDM BDM is responsible for the provision of installation guidelines that will assist the manufacturer of the apparatus system or installation to achieve compliance The resulting EMC behaviour is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the apparatus system or installa tion for which its own standards may apply ES Installation Clause 6 5 Several combined items of system finished product or other components brought together at a given place May include PDSs CDM or BDM possibly of different classes Restricted or Unrestricted Not intended to be placed on the market as a single functional unit no free movement Each system included is subject to the provisions of the EMC Directive No EC Declaration of conformity No CE marking For the PDSs or CDM BDMs themselves see Validity Fields 1 or 2 Responsibility of the manufacturer of the PDS may include commissioning The resulting EMC behaviour is the responsibility of the manufacturer of the installation in co operation with the user e g by following an appropriate EMC plan Essential protection requirements of EMC Directive apply regarding the neighbourhood of the installation 4 System Clause 6 4 Ready to use finished item s May include PDSs CDM or BDM possibly of different classes Restricted or Unrestricted Relates to application of PDS or CDM or BDM
108. GFC A Wimon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Asynchronous Word 1 monitor from Drive to DGFC 4152 DGFC A W2mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Asynchronous Word 2 monitor from Drive to DGFC 4153 DGFC A W3mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Asynchronous Word 3 monitor from Drive to DGFC 4154 Drv DGFC A W4mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Asynchronous Word 4 monitor from Drive to DGFC 4155 Drv DGFC A W5mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Asynchronous Word 5 monitor from Drive to DGFC 4156 DGFC A W6mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Asynchronous Word 6 monitor from Drive to DGFC 4157 DGFC A W7mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Asynchronous Word 7 monitor from Drive to DGFC 4158 DGFC A W8mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Asynchronous Word 8 monitor from Drive to DGFC 4159 DGFC A W9mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Asynchronous Word 9 monitor from Drive to DGFC APPL CARD CONFIG DGFC DGFCA gt Drv W mon 4160 DGFC A Drv W mon N A R 0 00 PV V F S B Asynchronous Word 0 monitor from DGFC to Drive 4161 DGFC A Drv Wimon N A R 0 00 V F S B Asynchronous Word 1 monitor from DGFC to Drive 4162 DGFC A Drv W2mon N A R 0 00 PV V F S B Asynchronous Word 2 monitor from DGFC to Drive 4163 DGFC A Drv W3mon N A R 0 00 PV V F S B Asynchronous Word 3 monitor from DGFC to Drive 4164 DGFC A Drv W4mon N A R 0 00 PV V F S B Asynchronous Word 4 monitor from DGFC to Drive 4165 DGFC A Drv W5mon
109. JONJON JON JON GO DES B B B Diem FF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF oe enn L mS pif p 0 N fore ort ore L se 0 jomomorom a A ON on Smp fonjonjonjonjonjon J 1 1 7 ai3150L Requirements Sinusoidal encoders XE connector on Regulation card Max frequency 80 kHz select the appropriate number of pulses depending on required max speed Number of pulses per revolution __ min 512 max 9999 see table below Channels two channel differential Input Voltage 1V pp Power supply 5V 8V Internal supply Load capacity gt 8 3 mA pp per channel input resistance 124 Ohms Cable max 500 feet 150 m screened 4 twisted pairs Configure drive software for the signal amplitude range of the encoder in use STARTUP Startup config Encoders config Std sin enc Vp ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 47 Speed D reference resolution rpm 0 003125 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 4096 0 125 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 0 25 512 512 512 1024 1024 1024 Hz 60 FSS 0 5 512 512 512 1024 1024 1024 1 512 512 512 1024 1024 1024 Mot pole pairs rpm 50Hz 1 3000 2 1500 3 1000 4 750 5 600 6 500 Mot pole pairs rpm 60Hz 1 3600 2 1800 3 1200 4 900 5 720 6 600 Full scale speed Max number of encoder pulses ppr Recommended min number of enc
110. Lift Vector AC Drives ARTDriveL ARTDriveL AVy AC AVy AC4 AVy BR AVy BR4 Instruction Manual E SIEI 3 Thank you for choosing this Gefran Siei product We will be glad to receive any possible information which could help us improving this manual The e mail address is the following techdoc siei it Before using the product read the safety instruction section carefully Keep the manual in a safe place and available to engineering and installation personnel during the product functioning period The manufacturer has the right to modify products data and dimensions without notice The data can only be used for the product description and they can not be understood as legally stated properties All rights reserved This manual is updated according to software version 3 5XX and RV33 4 regulation card The identification number of the software version can be read on the inverter nameplate or on the label on the FLASH memories mounted on the regulation card Table of Contents Safety Symbol Legend Precautions de securit esses 6 Chapter 0 Safety Precautions 7 Chapter 1 Functions and General Features eene 13 il Drive ss 13 UA E 15 Chapter 2 I
111. N PARAM Flux config Flux max limit Flux max lim sre This Function allows the user to control the maximum value of the Flux current It is linked to the control of the voltage loop In a condition where the Flux is 100 the voltage regulator prevails by controlling the motor It means that it is only possible to further limit the requirement of the voltage loop In case the Drive is active in the constant torque area it is possible to set an overflux up to 115 of the rated flux Such control is possible obviously only if the motor drive combination is in a position to supply a sufficient magnetizing current 1121 Flux level src N A RWS IPA1120 List 24 PIN F S B IPA 1120 Int fix maxlim Default It allows to select the origin of the signal to control the function refer to signals List 24 of Pick List manual ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 155 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode REGULATION PARAM Flux config Flux max limit Flux max lim cfg 1120 Intflx maxlim RWS 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV F S B It allows to set an alternative signal to connect to Flux level src REGULATION PARAM Flux config Flux max limit Flux max lim mon 1150 flx maxlim R 0 00 000 000 PV F S B Monitor of flux limit value in use REGULATION PARAM Flux config Output vit ref The Function allows the regulation of the flux in the constant power area where a voltage margin must be
112. O 0 inversion gt DO 1 src DO 1 inversion Spd is zero dly Not inverted DO2 src DO 2 inversion NULL Not inverted DO3 src DO 3 inversion NULL Not inverted DO 0X src DO 0X inversion NULL Not inverted DO 1X src DO 1X inversion NULL Not inverted DO 2X src DO 2X inversion NULL Not inverted DO 3X src DO 3X inversion NULL Not inverted DO 4X src DO 4X inversion NULL Not inverted DO 5X src DO 5X inversion NULL Not inverted 2 Lo DO 6X src DO 6X inversion NULL Not inverted DO 7X src DO 7X inversion NULL Not inverted 1 0 CONFIG Digital outputs Std digital outs Std dig out src 4065 DOO src N A RWS 909711511 V F S B IPA 9097 Drive OK Default It allows to connect the selected signal to the Digital output 0 and it can also defines the conditions that the relay contacts will close For example Drive OK The contact closes when the drive is powered up with no failure alarms Drive Ready The contact closes when the following conditions are fulfilled The drive is powered up There are no failure alarms present The drive is enabled The enable operation is defined by parameters En disable mode amp Commands sel The magnetizing procedure has been completed Drive is ready to deliver torque NOTE The contact opens immediately on a drive failure or when the drive is disabled refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual ARTDrivel Instruction Manual
113. P cont mon DOWN cont mon RUN cont mon L Nore To invert the sign of Speed ref corresponding to Start fwd and Start rev commands set parameter in TRAVEL Ramp rev inv src UP cont mon Speed ref ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 8 Lift Sequencies 119 Note 120 Chapter 8 Lift Sequencies ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 9 1 Parameter Legend Access mode parameter Parameter value R read only D Size value determined by drive size W write type Calc value calculated in function of other S saved in flash parameter 2 accessible with drive disabled DrvVer value dependent on drive fw version Motr value dependent on motor Parameter number List X signal list Parameter name Parameter unit of measure Unit Access Default Min Max TRAVEL DC braking 2 level 1836 DCbrake cmd src N A RWS IPA7125List3 V F S B IPA 7125 Lift DC Brake mon Default It allows to select the origin of the signal to command DC braking function refer to signals List 3 d The Pick List manual is available pdf format on the supplied CONF 99 cd rom Validity DB The reading keys are F Field oriented S Sensorless V V A Autotuning Setup mode B Brushless Point type AB A cantobe gt floattype
114. Parameter 131 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode absolute position information through SSI serial interface for initial synchronisation requires APC card 6 Digital Hall digital incremental encoder with A A B C C traces and three digital Hall sensor absolute position traces for initial synchronisation factory setting f DigitalExtern digital incremental encoder with A A B B traces and absolute position information through SSI serial interface for initial synchronisation requires APC card 8 SinCos Sin Cos absolute position traces for initial synchronisation incremental information is not used 9 Resolver resolver using option cards EXP RES refer its manual for jumpers 0 configurations 10 SinusoidalHiperface absolute encoder with Hiperface protocol from software rel 3 300 11 Sinusoidal Intern sinusoidal incremental encoder with A A B B C C traces absolute position traces are not necessary because phasing is performed automatically at every start from software rel 3 500 12 Digital Intern digital incremental encoder with A A B B C C traces absolute position traces are not necessary because phasing is performed automatically at every start from software rel 3 500 1890 Std enc pulses pp RWZ 1024 Calc Calc V F S B Encoder pulses per revolution ppr value of the standard input For brushless motors it is possible to use o
115. Ramp ref 2 refer to signals List 8 of Pick List manual List 8 PIN V F S B 7029 Ramp ref 3 src N A RWS 7038 IPA 7038 Int ramp ref 3 Default It select the origin of the signal of Ramp ref 3 List 45 PIN V F S B 7037 Ramp ref inv src N A RWS 4000 IPA 7121 DOWN Count mon Default List 3 PIN V F S B It connects the selected signal to the selector of the multiplier input if the signal is 0 multiply by 1 or if the signal is 1 multiply by 1 The multiplier allows to invert Ramp reference signal refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual By using DOWN cont mon Up cont mon it is possible to invert lift movement direction that corresponds to commands Start fwd src IPA 7115 Start rev sre IPA 7116 TRAVEL Ramp setpoint Ramp ref cfg 7030 Intramp ref 1 rpm RWS 0 Calc Calc PV V F S B Value of the Int ramp ref 1 variable 7031 Int ramp ref 2 rpm RWS 0 Calc Calc PV V F S B Value of the Int ramp ref 2 variable 7038 Int ramp ref 3 rpm RWS 0 Calc Calc PV V F S B Value of the Int ramp ref 3 variable TRAVEL Ramp setpoint Ramp ref mon 7032 Ramp ref 1 mon rpm R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PP V F S B Displaying of the Ramp ref 1 signal 7033 Ramp ref 2 mon rpm R 0 00 0 00 0 00 V F S B Displaying of the Ramp ref 2 signal 7039 Ramp ref 3 mon rpm R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PP V F S B Displaying of the Ramp ref 3 signal 7034 Ramp setpoint rpm 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV V F S
116. Reg Mode REGULATION PARAM Test generator Test gen mode 2756 Test gen mode N A RWS 0 0 6 DK V F S B 0 Off 1 Ramp ref 1 Ramp reference 1 2 Speed ref 1 Speed reference 1 3 Torque ref 2 Torque reference 2 4 Magn curr ref Magnetizing current reference 5 Flux ref Flux reference 6 Outvit lim Voltage reference This parameter defines where the test signal is connected in the control scheme REGULATION PARAM Tesi generator Test gen cfg 2745 Gen Hi ref cnt RWS 0 32767 32767 PV V F S B Value in count of the higher amplitude signal value 2750 Gen Low ref cnt RWS 0 32767 32767 PV V F S B Value in count of the lower amplitude signal value 2755 Gen Period sec RWS 10 0 10000 PV V F S B Period of the square wave REGULATION PARAM Test generator Test gen mon 2760 output cnt R 0 00 000 000 PV V F S B Monitorig the test generator output signal Gen output Gen period Gen Hi ref Gen Low ref SAVE PARAMETERS AVyL drive allows two different commands to save the parameters modified in the regulation mode selected by STARTUP menu Save Config command by all other menus SAVE PARAMETERS command Any changes made in STARTUP menu require Save Config command which saves all entire regulation mode selected It is recommended every time the user made any changes into STARTUP menu SAVE PARAMETERS command saves all the changes made out of STARTUP menu only When on the keypad display appears
117. S rpm I A 60 Current in torque constant unit Nm A is RMS current TIS EMF constant Vs RW D Size 0 0 0 0 FK B If the number is unknown set the parameter to zero the drive will automatically calculate an approximate value 970 Stator resistance ohm RW D Size 0 0 0 0 FK B Motor stator resistance value 980 LsS inductance H RW D Size 0 0 0 0 FK B Motor stator inductance value ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 127 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode Nore EMF costant Stator resistance and LsSinductance values are unknown set them to zero before running the current self tuning procedure Load default mot It selects and loads the motor standard parameters 0 Set 0 1 Set 1 Nore this selection the motor standard parameters with Set 1 or Set 2 are loaded making reference to the used Drive size Through this process motor data is overwritten SETUP MODE Autotune Complete still for AVy AC series Complete self tuning of current and flux loop with a stopped rotor Start enable data detection command 12 drive terminal must be cycle to 24Vdc Complete rot for AVy AC series Complete self tuning of current and flux loop with a moving rotor Start enable data detection command 12 drive terminal must be cycle to 24Vdc CurrReg for AVy AC and BR series Self tuning of current loop only with stopped motor Start enable data detection
118. STOM FUNCTIONS Compare Compare 2 Compare 2 cfg 6056 Cmp2Zinp0 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Value of the internal input signal 0 default connected to Cmp 2 inp 0 src 6057 Cmp2inp1 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Value of the internal input signal 1 default connected to Cmp 2 inp 1 src 6058 Cmp2inp2 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Value of the internal input signal 2 default connected to Cmp 2 inp 2 src 6059 2 function N A RWS 0 0 10 DP V F S B 0 None 1 l0 11 2 10 1 1 3 10 lt 1 4 10 gt 1 5 10 lt 1 lt 12 6 10 1 7 101 11 8 101 lt 9 gt 10 0 lt 1 lt 12 11 10 AND I1 AND 12 12 10 OR I1 AND 12 13 10 I1 6060 2 window cnt RWS 000 0 00 PP V F S B It allows to set a window stating an acceptable range among the signals of the Compare 2 block 6061 2 delay sec RWS 0 00 0 00 30 PP V F S B It allows to set a delay in seconds on the comparison transition in the Compare 2 block 6062 2 inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted It allows to invert the Compare 2 block output signal CUSTOM FUNCTIONS Compare Compare 2 Compare 2 mon 6063 Compare 2 output N A R 0 0 1 DV It allows to monitor the state of Compare 2 block output signal 0 FALSE 1 TRUE CUSTOM FUNCTIONS Pad parameters The use variables Pads are used for the data exchange with the option cards CUSTOM FUNCTIONS
119. TARTUP menu the drive enters in the parametrization mode STARTUP Startup config STARTUP Regulation mode Regulation mode V f control Select new mode V f control Press two times Select new mode Sensorless vect Press to confirm Regulation mode database selected Transfer param Yes gt Ent No gt Esc Press to transfer parameters from previous regulation mode to a newly selected regulation mode This operation is convenient only if some parameters have been set in previous regulation mode Otherwise press Esc to not transfer parameters The drive will restart in the new regulation mode this will take around 5 seconds Restart Please wait Chapter 7 Commissioning 85 NA Now go to sepu up to 7 1 3 V f Control switch on A V f Control mode set up then STARTUP Regulation mode Press to exit from STARTUP menu 7 1 3 V f Control mode Power up the drive This operation will take about 10 seconds and the drive will display LEDs blink for test AC Drive Lift Startup after 10 seconds R 0 S MONITOR R 0 S 0 STARTUP Nore Upon opening the STARTUP menu the drive enters in the parametrization mode STARTUP Startup config STARTUP CONFIG Enter setup mode wait few seconds SETUP MODE Drive data Mains voltage 400 V Press or o to select AC input voltage from the f
120. TDriveL version Used to scroll down menu items in menu navigation picklists in selectors or digit values in numeric editing After pressing shift key an item specific information menu is entered when applicable Help menu can be browsed with up down arrows Left arrow returns to normal mode Down arrow Help Used to scroll up menu items in menu navigation picklists in selectors or digit values in numeric editing Up arrow Alarm After pressing Shift key the Alarm list display mode is entered Active alarms and Alarms pending for acknowledge can be browsed with up downs arrows Alarms can be acknowledged whit the Enter key Left arrow returns to normal mode Used to go up one level in menu navigation to scroll digits in numeric edit mode to return to normal mode from alarm list or help modes After pressing shift key it is used to Escape out of numeric edit or selection with no change Left arrow Escape Used to go down one level in menu navigation to enter Enter Home Selections or numeric values after editing to issue commands to acknowledge alarms in the Alarm list mode Home second function return to Monitor menu from any main menu level Enter Shift Shift button enables the keypad second functions Rotation control Jog Help Alarm Escape Home 70 Chapter 6 Keypad Operation ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 6 2 Moving Ins
121. TION Through the combination of Mlt spd 50 src equal Digital input 4 Mit spd s1 src equal Digital input 5 and Mit spd s2 src equal Digital input 6 is possible to select Multi speed desired according to next table Mil spd sel Mtl spd sel Mtl spd sel ACTIVE SPEED 2 5 1 sre 0 src o 0 Multi speed O RE Multi speed 1 0 Malti speed 2 0 Multi speed 3 1 Multi speed 4 1 Multi speed 5 1 Multi speed 6 TAV3i011 Press o to exit from Speed profile menu AVyL drive allows to set a Ramp profile as the picture shows below Multispeed Speed ref MRO acceleration MRO acc ini jerk MRO acc end jerk Acceleration Multispeed Speed ref Multispeed Acceleration MRO dec end jerk MRO dec ini jerk MRO deceleration N mro end decel 110 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Nx ARTDriveL Instruction Manual TRAVEL Speed profile TRAVEL Ramp profile MRO acc ini jerk 1000 rpm s Press to set MRO acc ini jerk parameter press to confirm MRO acceleration 500 rpm s le Press to set MRO acceleration parameter press to confirm MRO acc end jerk 1000 rpm s de Press to set MRO acc end jerk parameter press to confirm MRO dec ini jerk 1000 rpm s ie Press to set MRO dec ini jerk parameter press to confirm MRO deceleration 500 rpm s de Press
122. Tera fan 3 4 E E 7 1 2x79 30 30 2x79 1100 1580 1390 1 f default L Ly 80 7 1820 tadl0040 1 975 Nore All the Drives have internal fans Heat dissipation losses refer to default Switching frequency Table 3 2 2 Minimum Cabinet Opening Suggested for the Cooling Minimum cooling opening cm sq inch Control section 31 4 8 31 4 8 Type 007 1030 040 2075 110 3150 36 5 6 2x150 2x 23 5 2x200 2x31 2x370 2x57 35 2x620 2x96 1 2 x 1600 2 x 248 tadl0050 185 4221 300 4371 450 5550 750 71320 od ee edd Fred Fg med 9 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 3 Installation Guidelines 31 3 2 1 Cooling Fans Power Supply Fan Control Logic function only for sizes AVy2040A C4 BR4 up to 5550 4 It allows to run internal fans only when the drive is enabled Fans will stop when the drive is disabled after a period of 300sec and heatsink temperature is below 60 degrees Fan control logic function signal is also repeated on the drive power board FEXT terminals for an auxiliary external fan Cooling Fans Power Supply for sizes AVy1007 to AVy5550 Power supply 24VAC for these fans is provided from the internal drive power supply unit Cooling Fans Power Supply for sizes AVy6750 to AVy81600 Power supply for the fans is externally connected by the user AC Input voltage is connected a
123. The digital outputs terminal 41 and 42 have same potential terminal 16 and terminal 46 as common supply Figure 4 4 1 A Potentials of the control section Digital 1 0 NPN connection l To Expansion Cards Analog output 1 Analog output 2 12 24V eo oO LL AT Enable Digital input 0 13 5 i o 1 T KI Digital input 1 24 8 H i i 14 i 1 WK Digital input 2 bo Digital output 1 C O 83 1 5 2 15 Lo O 85 i KI Digital input 3 i 2 Digital output 0 5 36 i igital outpu TE 9 0 oO i WK Digital input 4 Lt 2 1 i 37 o o H IH KI Digital input 5 AV te 1 si Digital output 2 o are oap Digital input 6 H L 1 25 90 n i ES KI Digital input 7 Digital output 3 io 42 LOAD i OV 24V 16 coM puo i OV 24V 4 i i Y po AV V us Internal power suppl i i from Power Card i i i 28 0 24 V 0v 18 i i 78 i tk T Over Temperature 26 79 Motor 7 i i 27 i hI Ur EIEN A Et eA aa Neha ance ri Note Combination NPN inputs PNP outputs and viceversa is not permitted ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 43 Figure 4 4 1 B Potentials of the control section Digital 1 0 PNP connection To Expansion
124. To have the access of Level 1 drive menus edit 12345 password into Insert Password parameter and confirm it using Enter button Nore Level 1 password must be set every recycle drive supply 72 Chapter 6 Keypad Operation ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 7 Commissioning via Keypad The ARTDrive Lift can operate with advanced Voltage Frequency control as default Sensorless vector control open loop Field Oriented vector control closed loop and Brushless All the regulation modes have their own independent parameter sets A commissioning executed in one mode should be repeated or transferred to another regulation mode 7 1 Commissioning for AVy AC AC4 Asychronous Motors Commissioning Set up Procedure Step Function Description Closed loop Field Oriented mode see chapter 7 1 1 Select the Drive comes factory defaulted to V f control change to Regulation mode Field Oriented vector control Set Drive data Go to Setup mode for drive data parametrization Mains voltage Ambient temp Switching freq Speed reference resolution Set Motor data Go to Setup mode for motor data parametrization Rated voltage Rated frequency Rated current Rated speed Rated power Cosphi Run motor Autotune Autotune procedure is a real motor parameters measurement two options are available Complete still can be used when motor is coupled to gearbox brake is applied and lift car is installed It coul
125. Tourr lim state N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Current limit state 0 Not reached 1 Reached REGULATION PARAM Flux config REGULATION PARAM Flux config Magnetiz config Autophase rot Start Autophasing command to phase brushless motors After pressing Start give the Enable and Start command to drive Motor must be free of any load brake must be released Motor will first align and then rotate slightly at very low speed Autophase still Start Autophasing command to phase brushless motors After pressing Start give the Enable and Start command to drive Drive will perform phasing procedure without rotation Brake can be locked from software rel 3 500 1810 Magn ramp time sec RWS D Size 0 01 5 PP Set of the ramp time of the magnetizing current 1815 Lock flux pos N A RWSZ 0 0 1 DP F S B 0 Off No locking of flux position 1 At magnetization Flux position is locked during magnetization 2 At Spd 0 Flux positon is locked when stop command has been issued and signal Speed is zero delayed becomes TRUE 3 At Magn amp Spd 0 Flux positon is locked during magnetization or when stop command has been issued and signal Speed is zero delayed becomes TRUE 4 At magn amp Ref 0 Flux positon is locked during magnetization or when both signals Speed reference is zero delayed and Speed is zero delayed become TRUE The function is useful for undesidered motor shaft rotation It allows to lock the Flux position REGULATIO
126. V A70P350 FWP350 71100 S1 F1 110 400A 660V A70P400 FWP400 71320 S1 F1 110 500A 660V 70 500 FWP500 am TAVy4140 Jean M ller Eltville Gould Shawmut Bussmann The technical data of the fuses e g dimensions weights heat dissipation auxiliary contactors are found in the manufacturers data sheets 4 7 3 Internal Fuses Table 4 7 3 1 Internal Fuses 2A fast 5 x 20 mm Bussmann 4185 to SF523220 or Schurter 81600 FSF0034 1519 or Littlefuse 217002 Fl Fl RS485 serial F2 24V interface Resettable fuse supply circuit 1007 to 81600 6750 to 71320 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 2 5A 6 3x32 Bussmann MDL 2 5 Gould Shawmut GDL1 1 2 Siba 70 059 76 2 5 Schurter 0034 5233 Fans transformer Fitted on Power card PV33 4 D and higher Power card PV33 5 B and higher Regulation card RV33 Regulation card RV33 4 and higher Bottom cover power terminals side tadl0170 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 55 4 8 Chokes Filters 4 8 1 AC Input Chokes A three phase inductance is strongly reccomended to be connected on the AC Input side in order to the input RMS current of ARTDriveL series drives prolong the life time of the DC link capacitors and the reliability of the input rectifier reduce the AC mains harmonic distortion reduce the problems due to a low impedence AC mains lt 1 The inductance can be provided by an AC Input choke or an AC Input transform
127. V pp analog ai3140L ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 4 5 1 XFR Connector Assignments on optional EXP RES Expansion Board for Resolver The connection with the drive is through a 15 poles high density sub D connector VGA type Please note that for resolver feedback it is mandatory to use a twisted pair cable with shields on each pair and a global shield The shield should be connected to ground on both sides Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 49 Pn1 2 J RESSINP pe s 3 8 mA analog RES SINN 1 V pp analog 3 8 mA analog 1 V pp analog 3 8 mA analog 1 V pp analog 3 8 mA analog p p ai3140ER pue Pai SSCS RES COSN i EE L1 Pins RESCOSP Input cos 1 1Vppanalog 3 8mA analog o Warning The pins number 1 2 7 9 11 14 are reserved Nore Refer to EXP RES manual code 1S5E66 for more details 4 5 2 Encoder Simulation The expansion board EXP RES provides one incremental encoder output with TTL Line Driver levels that can be used for simulation of a servomotor feedback device This function is performed by the microprocessor and it is possible to simulate an encoder output with a programmable number of pulses rev The output interface is optically isolated and therefore the encoder output must be supplied with an external 15 24 V supply that can be connected to terminals 96 and 97 of the EXP RES expansion bo
128. Value must be higher than zero 6011 An out 1 lo lim cnt RWS 16384 32768 0 PP V F S B Analog output 1 count value aimed at obtaining 10V Value must be higher than zero Analog outputs Std analog outs Analog output 1 An out 1 mon 6013 An out 1 mon cnt R 0 32768 32767 PP V F S B Analog output 1 count value displaying Analog outputs Std analog outs Analog output 2 An out 2 src 3580 An out 2 src N A RWS 4000 List 2 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the selected signal to the Analog output 2 refer to signals List 2 of Pick List manual 3576 An out 2 sgn src N A RWS 4000 List 2 V F S B It allows to select the sign of the signal connected on analog output from software rel 3 300 Analog outputs Std analog outs Analog output 2 An out 2 cfg 6017 An out 2 scale N A RWS 1 10 10 PP V F S B Scale or multiplicative factor of Analog output 2 6015 Anout2hilim cnt RWS 16383 0 32767 PP V F S B Analog output 2 count value aimed at obtaining 10V Value must be higher than zero 6016 An out 2 lo lim cnt RWS 16384 32768 0 PP V F S B Analog output 2 count value aimed at obtaining 10V Value must be higher than zero 166 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode Analog outputs Std analog outs Analog output 2 An out 2 mon 6018 An out 2 mon cnt R 0 00 32768 32676 PP V F S B
129. WOsrc 4142 Int DrvDGFC A 2 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Internal Asynchronous Word 2 value configuration default connected to Drv DGFC A WOsrc 4143 Int DrvDGFC A W3 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Internal Asynchronous Word 3 value configuration default connected to Drv DGFC A WOsrc 4144 Int DrvDGFC A W4 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Internal Asynchronous Word 4 value configuration default connected to Drv DGFC A WOsrc 4145 Int DrvDGFC A W5 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Internal Asynchronous Word 5 value configuration default connected to Drv DGFC A WOsrc 4146 Int DrvDGFC A W6 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Internal Asynchronous Word 6 value configuration default connected to Drv DGFC A WOsrc 4147 Int DrvDGFC A 7 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Internal Asynchronous Word 7 value configuration default connected to Drv DGFC A WOsrc 4148 Int DrvDGFC A W8 N A RWS 000 PV V F S B Internal Asynchronous Word 8 value configuration default connected to Drv DGFC A WOsrc 4149 DrvDGFC A W9 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Internal Asynchronous Word 9 value configuration default connected to Drv DGFC A WOsrc 196 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode APPL CARD CONFIG DGFC Drv gt DGFCA W mon 4150 DGFC A WOmon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Asynchronous Word 0 monitor from Drive to DGFC 4151 Drv D
130. WS 1000 0 30000 PP V F S B IGBT desaturation restart time ALARM CONFIG Inst overcurrent It trips when the IGBT instantaneous overcurrent is detected by output current sensor 9063 10C restart N A RWS 0 0 1 DP 0 off 1 on Instantaneous overcurrent restart 9064 10C restart time ms RWS 1000 0 30000 PP Instantaneous overcurrent restart time ALARM CONFIG Ground fault It trips when the output phase discharge to ground 9640 activity N A RWS 2 1 6 DP V F S B 1 Ignore 2 Warning 3 Disable drive 4 Stop 5 Fast stop 6 Curr limstp Ground fault activity 9641 GF threshold A RWS D Size Calc D Size PP V F S B Ground fault threshold ALARM CONFIG External fault It trips when the External fault input is active 9075 EF src N A RWS 4023 List3 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the External fault input terminal strip refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual 9060 EF activity N A RWS 3 2 6 DP V F S B 1 Ignore 2 Warning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 183 IPA Description Default Min Max 3 Disable drive 4 Stop 5 Fast stop 6 Curr limstp External fault activity Unit Access Format Reg Mode 9061 EF restart N A RWS 0 0 1 DP 0 off 1 on External fault restart V F S B 9062 EF restart time ms RWS 1000 0 External fault restart time 30000 V F S B 9600 EF hold off
131. WS OXFFF 0 1 DP V F S B 9616 Mask W3 S2 N A RWS 0 1 DP V F S B Alarm status Alm status mon 9630 W1 S1 N A R 0 0 Calc DP V F S B 9631 W2 S1 N A R 0 0 Calc DP V F S B 9632 AlmW3S1 N A R 0 0 Calc DP V F S B 9634 W1 S2 N A R 0 0 Calc DP V F S B ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 189 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 9635 Alm W2 82 N A R 0 Calc DP V F S B 9636 Alm W3 S2 N A R 0 Calc DP V F S B ALARM NAME PHI E i 22555554 d 5 Ef ae jos 4 Failure supply w w f wf w ws Undervoltage 2 2 Dis dive No Vshgconnims Yes Yes Yes Yes Overvliage w Vs Vs Vs ws imr 1 ost Lu fa Inst overcurrent 5 25 Dis drive to Yes logic on 2 alarms in 30 second Yes Yes Yes Yes Grund al Le pe ow w w ws w ts Curr fk loss w M Ys 1 External fault 8 28 Prog Yes Prog Yes Yes Prog Yes Yes Yes Spd fbk loss 9 Poo h vt Yes Yes Yes Module OT 0 30 Dis drive Yes Yes Yes was pa ew Edw sls 1000 msec X e Heatsink OT 3 33 Prog Yes Yes Yes Regulation OT 4 34 Prog Yes Yes Yes Intake air OT 5 35 Prog Yes Yes Yes Cont bi E m fom fs qu Pv es es Comm card fault 37 Prog Yes Yes Prog Yes Yes
132. Word 1 to be transmitted from Drive to APC card refer to signals List 29 of Pick List manual 4102 DGFC S W2src N A RWS 4107 List 29 PIN V F S B IPA 4107 Int DrvDGFC S W2 Default It allows to select the origin of Synchronous Word 2 to be transmitted from Drive to APC card refer to signals List 29 of Pick List manual 4103 DGFC S W3src N A RWS 4108 List 29 PIN V F S B IPA 4108 Int DrvDGFC S W3 Default It allows to select the origin of Synchronous Word 3 to be transmitted from Drive to APC card refer to signals List 29 of Pick List manual 4104 DGFC S W4src N A RWS 4109 List 29 PIN V F S B IPA 4109 Int DrvDGFC S W4 Default It allows to select the origin of Synchronous Word 4 to be transmitted from Drive to APC card refer to signals List 29 of Pick List manual APPL CARD CONFIG DGFC Drv gt DGFCS W cfg 4105 Int DrvDGFC S WO N A RWS 000 PV V F S B Internal Synchronous Word 0 value configuration default connected to Drv DGFC S WOsrc 4106 Int DrvDGFC S W1 N A RWS 000 PV V F S B Internal Synchronous Word 1 value configuration default connected to Drv DGFC S Wisrc 4107 Int DrvDGFC S W2 N A RWS 000 PV V F S B Internal Synchronous Word 2 value configuration default connected to Drv DGFC S W2src 194 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 4108 Int DrvDGFC S W3 N A RWS 0 00
133. ad e g Var compensation capacitors should not be connected to the output of the drive terminals U2 V2 W2 Aucune charge capacitive ne doit tre connect e la sortie du convertisseur bornes U2 V2 et W2 par exemple des condensateurs de mise en phase The electrical commissioning should only be carried out by qualified personnel who are also responsible for the provision of a suitable ground connection and a protected power supply feeder in accord ance with the local and national regulations The motor must be pro tected against overloads La mise en service lectrique doit tre effectu e par un personnel qualifi Ce dernier est responsable de l existence d une connexion de terre ad quate et d une protection des c bles d alimentation selon les prescriptions lo cales et nationales Le moteur doit tre prot g contre la surcharge Caution No dielectric tests should be carried out on parts of the drive A suit able measuring instrument internal resistance of at least 10 kQ V should be used for measuring the signal voltages Il ne faut pas x cuter de tests de rigidit di lectrique sur des parties du convertisseurs Pour mesurer les tensions des signaux il faut utiliser des instruments de mesure appropri s r sistance interne minimale 10 Nore If the Drives have been stored for longer than two years the operation of the DC link capacitors may be impaired and must be reformed Before comm
134. ain of current loop 2007 Currl base value V A s RWS Calc 0 00 FK V F S B Basic value of the integral gain of current loop REGULATION PARAM Curr regulator Dead time comp The function allows for compensation of the output voltage distortion due to IGBT voltage drop and its switching characteristics 530 Dead time limit VI RWS Calc 0 00 50 PP V F S B Value of the voltage compensation 540 Dead time slope V A RWS 0 00 100 PP V F S B Compensation Gradient REGULATION PARAM Flux regulator REGULATION PARAM Flux regulator Percent values 2013 gain 96 RWS Calc 0 100 PP F S Proportional gain of flux loop 2015 Fixi gain 96 RWS Cac 0 100 PP F S Integral gain of flux loop REGULATION PARAM Flux regulator Base values 2021 FIxP base value RWS 0 00 Calc F Basic value of the proportional gain of flux loop 2022 Fixi base value A Wb SIRWS Calc 000 FK F S Basic value of the integral gain of flux loop REGULATION PARAM VIt regulator REGULATION PARAM VIt regulator Percent values 2031 VIP gain 96 RWS Calc 0 00 100 PP F S B Proportional gain of voltage loop 2033 gain RWS Calc 0 00 100 PP F S B Integral gain of voltage loop ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 153 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode REGULATION PARAM VIt regulator Base val
135. al The signal must always have a positive sign through which if used as a reference it is possible to change the motor rotation direction via Al 1 sgn src Through the An inp X thr output it is possible to state if the current signal is lower than the one of the set threshold If the current is lt 4mA the output supplies a signal error signal This for example can be combined with a digital output Nore inp 1 type selection requires a correct jumpers configuration of RV33 regulation card 10V 10V amp 0 10V S82 0FF S9 OFF S10 OFF 0 20mA amp 4 20mA S8 0N S9 ON 510 ON 5002 Al alt value cnt RWS 0 32767 32767 PV V F S B Alternative reference value in count for Analog input 1 5003 Aninpithr cnt RWS 3277 16384 16383 V F S B Analog Input 1 threshold value in count 5004 Aninp 1 scale N A RWS 1 16 16 PP V F S B Analog Input 1 scale factor 5006 An inp 1 filter sec RWS 0 0064 0 00 4 096 V F S B Time constant of the Analog Input 1 filter 5007 Aninp 1 low lim cnt RWS 16384 32768 32767 PP V F S B Lower limit of the Analog Input 1 block output in count see figure below 5008 Aninpihilim cnt RWS 16383 32768 32767 V F S B Upper limit of the Analog Input 1 block output in count see figure below Al 1 offs tune Start Autotune command for the Analog Input 1 offset Input automatic fine tuning To run the autotune put the input signal to its m
136. al refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual Analog inputs Exp analog inps Analog input 1X An inp 1X cfg 5060 An inp 1X type NA RWS 0 0 2 DP V F S B 0 10V 10V 1 0 20mA 0 10V 3 4 20mA For An inp 1X type description refer to An inp 1 type description above ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 163 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 5062 Aninp 1X thr cnt RWS 3277 16384 16383 PP V F S B Analog Input 1X threshold value in count 5063 inp 1X scale N A RWS 1 16 16 PP V F S B Analog Input 1X scale factor 5065 An inp 1X lo lim cnt RWS 16384 32768 32767 PP V F S B Lower limit of the Analog Input 1X block output in count see figure of Analog Input 1 above 5066 inp 1X hi lim cnt RWS 16383 32768 32767 PP V F S B Upper limit of the Analog Input 1X block output in count see figure of Analog Input 1 above Al 1X offs tune Refer to Al 1 offs tune description above Al 1X gain tune Refer to Al 1 offs gain description above Analog inputs Exp analog inps Analog input 1X An inp 1X mon 5067 An inp 1X output cnt R 0 00 32768 32767 PV V F S B Analog Input 1X output count displaying 5068 inp 1X lt thr N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Display of threshold compensator state of Analog Input 1X 1 the condition is true 5061 inp 1X offset cnt RWS 0 16384 16383 PP V F S B Analog Input 1X
137. al output value of Word 1 1 0 CONFIG Word gt Bits The Word Decomposing Block Word gt Bits allows to set some signals on a digital word each signal composing the word on the Block input can be combined with an output channel It is useful to communicate for example between APC card and Drive The Wordn gt Bits block has an input word and 16 Bx Wn decomp output bits Two Word gt Bits blocks are available WO decomp sre WORD_0 BIT 0 BO WO decomp gt Bits W1 decomp src WORD_1 BIT 1 B1 WO decomp gt Bits BIT_14 B14 WO decomp gt Bits BIT_15 B15 WO decomp gt Bits 1 0 CONFIG Word gt Bits Word0 gt Bits src 2120 WO decomp src N A RWS 2121 List 26 PIN V F S B 2121 WO decomp inp Default It allows to connect the word that will be input to decomposing block refer to signals List 26 of Pick List manual 1 0 CONFIG Word gt Bits Word0 gt Bits cfg 2121 decomp inp N A RWS 0X0000 DV V F S B It allows to set the WO decomp inp value 1 0 CONFIG Word gt Bits Word0 gt Bits mon 2122 WO decomp mon N A R 0 0 DP V F S B Monitor of the hexadecimal input value of the Word 0 decomposed 2123 0 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 0 of Word 0 decomposed displaying 2124 B1 0 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 1 of Word 0 decomposed displaying 2125 B2 0 decomp N
138. amp ref 2 p 149 Int ramp ref 3 p 149 Int speed ref 1 p 150 Int speed ref 2 p 150 Int torque ref 2 p 154 Intake air S OT p 185 Inuse flx maxlim p 156 Inuse Outvit ref p 156 Inuse S I gain p 157 Inuse S P gain p 157 InUse Spdl gain p 153 InUse SpdP gain p 153 Inuse Tcurr lim p 155 Inuse Tcurr lim p 155 IOC restart p 183 IOC restart time p 183 IS ctrl src p 133 L Landing control p 130 Landing distance p 130 Landing init src p 130 Landing ratio p 130 Landing zone p 130 Last SBI error p 192 Life time p 125 Lift sequence p 140 Load default p 137 Load setup p 129 Load weight p 129 Lock flux pos p 155 LS inductance p 127 p 196 p 196 p 196 p 196 p 196 p 196 p 196 p 196 p 194 p 194 p 194 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Magn curr ref p 123 Magn ramp time p 155 Magnetiz config p 155 Magnetizing curr p 123 Mains voltage p 126 ask W1 51 p 189 ask W1 S2 p 189 ask W2 S1 p 189 ask W2 52 p 189 ask W3 S1 p 189 ask W3 S2 p 189 axlinear speed p 138 easured DTL p 128 easured DTS p 128 129 easured LsSigma p 128 129 Measured Rs p 128 Mechanical data p 129 Mit ramp sO src p 141 Mit ramp sel mon p 141 Mit spd out mon p 141 Mit spd s 0 src p 140 Mit spd s 1 src p 141 Mit spd s 2 src p 141 It spd sel mon p 141 OL activity p 188 ONITOR p 122 OT activity p 184 OT hold off p 184 ot OL accum p 135 ot OL accum p 123 ot OL trip p 135 OT restart p 184 OT restart time p 184 otor data p 126 127 otor in
139. ard The encoder output signals are available on the XFO connector with the following connection diagram Pint B Digital Encoder Simulation B channel Digital Encoder Simulation C channel Digital Encoder Simulation C channel o 4 ai3307L Note Jumper S2 and 3 on the EXP RES optional board must be OFF Note To enable encoder simulation set Rep sim encoder parameter 50 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 4 6 Connection Diagrams Figure 4 6 1 Standard Connection Diagram RV3 regulation board Safety contacts 5 9 8 T Tu nmm 12 Dig Inp 0 Enable Start fwd Dig Inp 1 Start rev Dig inp 2 Dig Inp 3 mal COM 010 Mitspd s 0 Dig Inp o big np External Mit spd s 2 Fault reset BU control Drive ready Speed is 0 Drive OK Brake cont mon EM EMS signal EEE FEXT Internal External fan control logic te MAINS mi 3Ph uA m FR _ K3M a es Fans will always start when drive is enabled Fans will stop when drive is l disabled after a period of 300sec 9 g FR R and heatsink temperature is below 60 degrees 9 g b 2 Note Fan Control Logic function only for sizes AVy2040A C4 up to AVy5550AC4 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 51 4 6 1 Expansion Card Connection Figure 4 6 2 Common Output Contactors Management
140. ault Load default Drive reset with default parameter values in the selected regulation mode only Each regulation mode has its own Load default command Nore Load default command does not reset SETUP MODE with default parameter values Drive Motor data and Autotune values are mantained Use Save config command to save default parameter values such that are preserved for next power up STARTUP Startup config Load saved Load saved Reload of the last saved database selected STARTUP Regulation mode 100 Regulation mode N A R 0 0 5 DK V F S B It allows to select the desired regulation mode When the Regulation mode parameter is selected the active regulation mode is displayed in order to change it to a new mode press Enter Select new mode will be displayed then scroll the list 0 V f control 1 Field oriented 2 Sensorless 3 Setup mode asynchronous motors 4 Brushless 5 Setup mode brushless motors After new regulation mode is selected it is possible to copy transfer parameters from previous regulation mode This operation is convenient if drive has been parametrized in previous regulation mode from software rel 3 500 Nore Appropriate firmware is required using the drive in Brushless mode STARTUP Import recipe In recipe user can store its configuration of parameters for a given application By re calling appropriate recipe file all the necessary application parameters ar
141. ault It allows to connect the Bit 5 signal selected to the Word 0 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 2106 WordO B6 src N A RWS 4000 List1 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 6 signal selected to the Word 0 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 176 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min or src IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 7 signal selected to the Word 0 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual Max Format Reg Mode Ist F 9 2108 WordO B8 src N A RWS 4000 IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 8 signal selected to the Word 0 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual Listi PIN V F S B 2109 WordO B9 src N A RWS 4000 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 9 signal selected to the Word 0 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual List1 PIN V F S B 2110 WordO B10 src N A RWS 4000 IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 10 signal selected to the Word 0 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual Listi PIN V F S B 2111 WordO B11 src N A RWS 4000 IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 11 signal selected to the Word 0 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual List1 PIN V F S B 2112 WordO B12 src N A RWS 4000 IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect th
142. ax Format Reg Mode APPL CARD CONFIG The access to APPL CARD CONFIG menu is allowed by Level 1 password 12345 It must to be set in the SERVICE menu APC option card is used for advanced lift applications The communication between the Drive and the APC is performed via two channels for each direction from drive to APC Drv gt DGFCS writing to drive 5 Synchronous words Drv gt DGFCA writing to drive 10 Asynchronous words from APC to drive DGFCS gt Drv reading from APC 5 Synchronous words DGFCA gt Drv reading from APC 10 Asynchronous words The Words move the data from the APC to the Drive can be found in the source selecting lists For more information following the instructions on DGFC 386y 1 card APC100 card manual APPL CARD CONFIG DGFC DGFC config 4129 DGFC enable N A RWS 0 0 1 DK V F S B 0 Disabled 1 Enabled It allows to enable APC option cards SAVE PARAMETERS command and drive recycle power are required APPL CARD CONFIG DGFC DGFC sync Ch APPL CARD CONFIG DGFC Drv gt DGFCS W src 4100 Drv DGFC S W src N A RWS 4105 List 29 PIN V F S B IPA 4105 Int DrvDGFC S WO Default It allows to select the origin of Synchronous Word 0 to be transmitted from Drive to APC card refer to signals List 29 of Pick List manual 4101 Drv DGFC S Wisrc N A RWS 4106 List 29 PIN V F S B IPA 4106 Int DrvDGFC S W1 Default It allows to select the origin of Synchronous
143. aying 4050 DI 5X monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 5X terminal displaying 4051 DI 6X monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 6X terminal displaying 4052 DI 7X monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 7X terminal displaying 4053 DI 8X monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 8X terminal displaying 4054 DI 9X monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 9X terminal displaying 4055 DI 10X monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 10X terminal displaying 4056 DI 11X monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 11X terminal displaying 4057 DIX BA9876543210 N A R 0 0 DV V F S B Expanded digital inputs displaying Under each number the logical state of each single input is displayed ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 171 IPA 1 0 CONFIG Digital inputs Exp dig inp en Description Unit Access Format Reg Mode 3902 N A Exp dig inp en 0 Disabled 1 Enabled RWS It enables the expanded digital inputs DV V F S B 1 0 CONFIG Digital inputs Destinations This read only menu allows the user to see where the Digital inputs are connected If more then one source is connected to the Digital Input only first one is shown If no sources are connected the message Not used is displayed 4505 Enable dst It displays the Digital Input 0 Enable destination 4506 011 dst It di
144. bition or the enabling of the channel C pulses reading It has to be correctly selected in order to detect appropriately the encoder loss alarm S17 ON channel C index readingZON 517 OFF channel C index reading OFF Table 4 5 3 Encoders Connections Regulation card XE CONNECTOR PIN XECONNECTORPIN Encoder type pd 112131415 61718 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 99 B 8V C C A OV B T5V E E F F G G Internal 5V Encoder Power Supply DET spe ef e e e e e e e RE sec mpl Te e e e e e ejeje e em an RU Helen CA CR LR ECC IER ses pl e e e e e ejejejejejej ej e e Internal 8V Encoder Power Supply TO NENNEN af cd 9 En en emma __SEHS e e e e e e ej e jJejejejejej e ai3160 46 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Regulation card Encoder type 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 8V C C A A OV B 5V E E F G G Le CL e e TERMINALS XS connector 2 3 5 7 9 RxA RxB SEHiperf iperface TxA ov 5 Sole connect connect P with pin 8 with pin 9 ai3161L Note In this case the cable must be split in two DE ECON ONT ONJonf on on MFP TTL SS oon onfonfonfon B B B B ssc on onfonfon ony TAT AT AT Ay A A on ov Sem _ ONJON
145. blinking message Use Save Config use Save Config command 158 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA 1 0 CONFIG The access to 1 0 CONFIG menu is allowed by Level 1 password 12345 It must all be set in the SERVICE menu Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 1 0 CONFIG Commands Configuration of Enable Start commands All parameters in this menu have default values set for lift application 1 0 CONFIG Commands Commands src 153 Term StrStp src N A RWS 4001 List 16 PIN V F S B IPA 4001 ONE Default It allows to select the signal to generate the Start 1 command and of the terminal strip Stop 0 command refer to signals List 16 of Pick List manual 9210 Term Start src N A RWS 4000 List 16 PIN V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to select the signal to generate the terminal strip Start command refer to signals List 16 of Pick List manual 9211 Term Stop src N A RWS 4000 List 16 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to select the signal to generate the terminal strip Stop command refer to signals List 16 of Pick List manual 156 Dig Enable src N A RWS 7128 List17 PIN V F S B IPA 7128 Lift Enable mon Default It allows to select the signal to generate a digital Enable command refer to signals List 17 of Pick List manual 157 Dig StrStp src N A RWS 7129 List 17 V F S B IPA 7129 Lift Sta
146. cidentelle m me s il est d sactiv sauf s il a t d branch de l alimentateur courant altern Never open the device or covers while the AC Input power supply is switched on Minimum time to wait before working on the terminals or inside the device is listed in section 4 12 on Instruction manual Ne jamais ouvrir l appareil lorsqu il est suns tension Le temps mini mum d attente avant de pouvoir travailler sur les bornes ou bien l int rieur de l appareil est indiqu dans la section 4 12 If the front plate has to be removed because of ambient temperature higher than 40 degrees the user has to ensure that no occasional contact with live parts may occur Si la plaque frontale doit tre enlev e pour un fonctionnement avec la temp rature de l environnement plus haute que 40 C l utilisateur doit s assurer par des moyens opportuns qu aucun contact occasionnel ne puisse arriver avec les parties sous tension Do not connect power supply voltage that exceeds the standard speci fication voltage fluctuation permissible If excessive voltage is ap plied to the Drive damage to the internal components will result Ne pas raccorder de tension d alimentation d passant la fluctuation de tension permise par les normes Dans le cas d une alimentation en ten sion excessive des composants internes peuvent tre endommag s Warning Power supply and grounding Attention Alimentation puissance et mise la terre In case o
147. ck trip is reported at the end of run This allows the car to arrive at floor in case of faulty brake status switch 186 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode ALARM CONFIG Brake feedback Door feedback 7144 Door fbk src N A RWS IPA7139 List3 PIN V F S B IPA 7139 Door open mon Default Refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual Source to provide Feedback to check status of the command provided through the input 9099 Door activity N A RWS 3 1 6 DP V F S B 1 Ignore 2 Warning 3 Disable drive 4 Stop 5 Fast stop 6 Curr limstp Door feedback alarm activity from software rel 3 300 7137 Door hold off ms RWS 200 0 00 65535 PP V F S B Alarm hold off time during this time mismatch in command and feedback is ignored Door open mon Command to open the door No Alarm Alarm Door fbk fail Door fbk src off ALARM CONFIG Comm card fault It trips when LAN communication is interrupted LAN communication between drive and Field Bus optional card 9074 CCF activity N A RWS 3 2 6 DP V F S B 2 Warning 3 Disable drive 4 Stop 5 Fast stop 6 Curr limstp Comm card fault activity 4200 CCF restart N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 off 1 on Comm card fault restart 4201 CCF restart time ms RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V F S B Comm card fault restart time ALARM CONFIG Appl card fault It trips when optional coprocessor communicat
148. cluding motor ground must be connected inside the motor terminal box l Do not operate the Drive without the ground wire connected The motor chassis should be grounded to earth through a ground lead separate from all other equipment ground leads to prevent noise cou pling Ne pas faire fonctionner le drive sans prise de terre Le chassis du moteur doit tre mis la terre l aide d un connecteur de terre separ des autres pour viter le couplage des perturbations Le connecteur de terre devrait tre dimensionn selon la norme NEC ou le Canadian Electrical code The grounding connector shall be sized in accordance with the NEC or Canadian Electrical Code The connection shall be made by a UL listed or CSA certified closed loop terminal connector sized for the Caution wire gauge involved The connector is to be fixed using the crimp tool specified by the connector manufacturer Le raccordement devrait tre fait par un connecteur certifi et mentionn boucle ferm par les normes CSA et UL et dimensionn pour l paisseur du cable correspondant Le connecteur doit tre fix a l aide d un instru ment de serrage specifi par le producteur du connecteur Do not perform a megger test between the Drive terminals or on the control circuit terminals Ne pas ex cuter un test megger entre les bornes du drive ou entre les bornes du circuit de contr le 10 Chapter O Safety Precauti
149. command 12 drive terminal must be cycle to 24Vdc FluxReg rot for AVy AC series Self tuning of flux loop with a moving rotor only Start enable data detection command 12 drive terminal must be cycle to 24Vdc FluxReg still for AVy AC series Self tuning of flux loop with a stopped rotor only Start enable data detection command 12 drive terminal must be cycle to 24Vdc SETUP MODE Autotune Results 2780 Measured Rs ohm RW Calc Calc Calc V F S B Value of the phase resistance detected on the stator of the motor 2790 Measured DTL V RW Calc 0 Calc V F S B IGBT dead time limit 2800 Measured DTS ohm RW Calc 0 Calc V F S B IGBT dead time slope 2810 Measured LsSigma RW Calc Calc Calc V F S B Value of inductance detected on the stator of the motor 2820 Measured Rr ohm RW Calc Calc Calc V F S Value of resistance detected on the rotor of the motor 2830 Measured Rr2 ohm RW Calc Calc Calc V F S Value of resistance 2 detected on the rotor of the motor 2840 Measured P1 flux N A RW Calc 0 00 1 000 V F S P1 coefficient of the Flux curve measured 2850 Measured P2 flux N A RW Calc 3 18 FK V F S P2 coefficient of the Flux curve measured 2860 Measured P3 flux N A RW Calc 0 00 1 00 V F S P3 coefficient of the Flux curve measured 2870 Measured Im Nom A RW Calc 0 00 0 00 V F S Value of the rated magnetizing c
150. d 1 Inverted 4015 015 inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4016 016 inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 169 IPA Description Unit 4017 017 inversion N A 0 1 Not inverted Inverted Access RWS Default 0 0 Max 1 Format Reg Mode DP V F S B 1 0 CONFIG Digital inputs Std digital inps Std dig inp mon 4020 DI 0 Enable mon N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Enable terminal displaying 4021 011 monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 1 terminal displaying 4022 DI2 monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 2 terminal displaying 4023 0 monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 3 terminal displaying 4024 DI 4 monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 4 terminal displaying 4025 015 monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 5 terminal displaying 4026 016 monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 6 terminal displaying Digital Input 6 terminal displaying 4027 017 monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 7 terminal displaying 4028 017654321 N A R 0 0 DP V F S B Standard digital inputs displaying Under each number the logical state of each single input is displayed 1 0 CONFIG Digital inputs Exp digital inps Exp dig inp cfg 4030 DI OX inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4031 DI 1X in
151. d cause limited shaft rotation when brake is not applied Complete rot can be used when motor is uncoupled or gearbox does not represent more than 5 load and lift car is not installed It causes motor shaft rotation close to the rated speed Set all system System mechanical data mechanical data Gearbox ratio Pulley diameter Full scale speed 0 9 00 6 1 Feedback from encoder connected to XE Encoder type connector on Regulation card configuration 6 2 Feedback from encoder connected to XFI connector on EXP optional card E L e Go to step 6 up to step 9 of chapter 7 1 3 ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Chapter 7 Commissioning 73 Step Function Description Open loop Sensorless vector mode see chapter 7 1 2 Select the Drive comes factory defaulted to V f control Sensorless Regulation mode vector mode selection NY Go to step 2 up to step 9 of chapter 7 1 3 Step Function Description VA control mode see chapter 7 1 3 Switch on Drive comes factory defaulted to V f control Set Drive data Go to Setup mode for drive data parametrization Mains voltage Ambient temperature and Switching freq Set Motor data Go to Setup mode for motor data parametrization Rated voltage Rated frequency Rated current Rated speed Rated power Cosphi Run motor Autotune Autotune procedure is a real motor parameters measurement two options a
152. d 6 N A RWS 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Pad 6 9123 Digpad7 N A RWS 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Pad 7 9124 Dig pad 8 N A RWS 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Pad 8 9125 Dig pad9 N A RWS 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Pad 9 202 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 9126 Dig pad 10 N A RWS 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Pad 10 9127 Dig pad 11 N A RWS 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Pad 11 9128 Dig pad 12 N A RWS 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Pad 12 9129 Dig pad 13 N A RWS 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Pad 13 9130 Dig pad 14 N A RWS 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Pad 14 9131 Dig pad 15 N A RWS 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Pad 15 CUSTOM FUNCTIONS Connect This block function connects signals to programmable block area using drive parameters that are accessible through the Conf99 PC program or drive keypad menu Connect A connects up to 7 analog input signals Connect B connects up to 7 digital signals inputs CUSTOM FUNCTIONS Connect Connect A 6070 ConnectA inp 0 src N A RWS IPA4000 List2 PIN V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default 6071 inp 1 src N A RWS 4000 List2 PIN V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default 6072 inp 2 src N A RWS 4000 List2 PIN V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default 6073 inp 3 src N A RWS 4000 List2 PIN V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default 6074
153. d param word p 201 Pad parameters p 201 Percent values p 152 153 Pole pairs p 127 Pos P gain p 130 Pos speed limit p 131 Pre torque p 146 Pre torque gain p 147 Pre torque src p 147 Pre torque time p 146 Pre torque type p 147 Pre trq sign src p 147 Prop filter p 145 Protocol type p 191 Pulley diameter p 129 R Ramp function p 149 Ramp out enable p 149 Ramp out mon p 150 Ramp profile p 138 Ramp ref p 122 Ramp ref 1 mon p 149 Ramp ref 1 src p 149 Ramp ref 2 mon p 149 Ramp ref 2 src p 149 Ramp ref 3 mon p 149 Ramp ref 3 src p 149 Ramp ref cfg p 149 Ramp ref inv src p 149 Ramp ref mon p 149 Ramp ref src p 149 Ramp setpoint p 149 Ramp shape p 149 Rated current p 126 127 Rated frequency p 126 Rated power p 127 Rated speed p 127 Rated voltage p 126 127 Regen gains p 157 Regulation mode p 137 REGULATION PARAM p 152 Regulation S OT p 185 Rep Sim enc sel p 133 Rep Sim encoder p 133 Results p 128 RG sensor temp p 123 Chapter 12 Parameters Index 223 RGS activity p 185 RGS hold off p 185 RGS restart p 185 RGS restart time p 185 Rope weight p 129 RS485 p 191 S mot HPgain p 156 157 Save config p 137 SAVE PARAMETERS p 151 158 181 193 198 204 SBI config p 191 SBI Drv WO mon p 193 SBI Drv W1 mon p 193 SBI Drv W2 mon p 193 SBI Drv W3 mon p 193 SBI Drv W4 mon p 193 SBI Drv W5 mon p 193 SBI enable p 191 SBI monitor p 192 SBI gt Drv W mon p 193 SBI gt Drv word p 193 Seq start mode p 140 Seq start s
154. dD ref res 25 5 ref res SpdD ref res Table 2 3 6 3 Speed Regulator Bandwidth Spd Control Typ Spd Reg Regulation mode Max Spd reg bandwidth rad sec Accuracy c Enc Sin Enc Dig Fmode Enc Dig Fpmode SinCos Res Field oriented 710000 1 300 Spd 15rpm 0 01 for ppr 1024 Sensorless vect 5001 100 Spd gt FSS 100 0 3 FSS 0 5 FSS 50 1 V f control gt 100 1 300 EAE c Standard 1500rpm b 4 pole motor Table 2 3 6 4 Torque Specifications Torque ref Typ Torque Re Typ b time Regulation mode Accuracy d 9 Trq Control range d Mot rated torque 10096 Spd range Max Mot Rated speed min Mot Rated speed 10 Torque range Max Mot Rated torque min Mot Rated torque 10 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 2 Inspection procedures Components Identification and Std Specs 27 Chapter 3 Mechanical Installation Guidelines 3 1 Dimensions and Mounting Methods Figure 3 1 1 Drive Dimensions Sizes 1007 3150 Figure 3 1 2 Mounting Methods Sizes 1007 3150 E5 2 ETT Zl V YY 7 E2 E4 2 2 Mounting with external dissipator E Mounting wall D 28 Chapter 3 Installation Guidelines ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Table 3 1 1 Drive Dimensions and Weights Sizes 1007 3150
155. ds due to possible failures The resistors have to be protected using thermal protection devices Such devices do not have to interrupt the circuit where the resistor is inserted but their auxiliary contact must interrupt the power supply of the drive Warning power section In case the resistor foresees the precence of a protection contact such contact has to be used together with the one belonging to the thermal protection device 4 9 1 Internal Braking Unit The Internal Braking Unit is included as standard up to size 3150 The braking resistor is optional and has always to be mounted externally For parameter setting refer to parameter list The figure below shows the configuration for internal brake unit operation Figure 4 9 1 1 Connection with Internal Braking Unit and External Braking Resistor Braking Unit VI L2 W1 L3 BRI c EF D E vari la o Fi Braking resistor 0 58 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 4 9 2 External Braking Resistor Recommended resistors for use with internal braking unit Table 4 9 2 1 Lists and Technical Data of the External Standard Resistors Inverter Resistor Pyer Rgr Eger Type Type kW Ohm kJ MRI T600 100R 5 Se 2040 Excess p cum qe pe 2075 310 MRUTI30049R 13 49 s 2
156. e Bit 12 signal selected to the Word 0 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual Listi PIN V F S B 2113 WordO B13 src N A RWS 4000 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 13 signal selected the Word 0 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual List1 PIN V F S B 2114 0 B14 src N A RWS 4000 IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 14 signal selected to the Word 0 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual Listi PIN V F S B 2115 0 B15 src N A RWS 4000 IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 15 signal selected to the Word 0 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual List1 PIN V F S B 1 0 CONFIG Bits gt Word Bits gt Word0 mon 2116 comp out N A R 0 0 Monitor for the hexadecimal output value of Word 0 DV V F S B 1 0 CONFIG Bits gt Word Bits gt Word1 src 9340 Word1 BO src N A RWS 4000 IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 0 signal selected to the Word 1 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual List1 PIN V F S B 9341 Word B1 src N A RWS 4000 IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 1 signal selected to the Word 1 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual List PIN V F S B ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 177 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 9342 Word B2 src N A RWS
157. e at low speeds The encoder cable must made of twisted pairs with a global shield should be connected to the ground on the Drive side Typically shield should not be connected to ground on the motor side In some installation with high electromagnetical noise connecting the shield also on motor side helps to suppress pickup of false encoder pulses and reduces amount of disturbanes in the measured speed ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 45 In case of brushless motor or where the cable length is more than 100 meters 328 feet a cable with a shield on each conductor pair must be used The shield must be connected to the common point OV The global shield must always be grounded Some types of sinusoidal encoders may require installation with galvanic isolation from the motor frame and shaft Table 4 5 1 Recommended Cable Section and Length for the Connection of Encoders 1 0055 Table 4 5 2 Encoders Setting via 511 523 Jumpers 520 521 22 523 526 LS e ON ON ON ON ON onjo 7 J orj or B B B B FF om QE Lo sc o Al A A oN ov OFF OFF OFF OFF L RECO 6 jerrorrorr __ SEHiperfa ON ON ON ON eA A RR ER MS ai3150L If the encoder is not provided of the zero channel S17 OFF With EXP RES Regulation card RV33 4B and higher The jumper S17 selects the inhi
158. e dly eo SNc Cont close delay Vo At Only FOC BRS Only V F Running Start Fw Rw Close contac Start magnet Open brake Close brake Start Fw Rw Wait 0 ref 116 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Figure 8 2 Detail Starting Enable Start fwd src Mit spd s 0 src Multispeed 1 gt gt o Si Bis x jas a D Q f e 9 28 Ss E o zm ea Speed ref MRO ini jerk acceleration MRO acc end jerk Acceleration Magnetization current Lift Start mon BRAKE cont mon BRAKE 2 cont mon Lift Enable mon RUN cont mon ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 7 Commissioning 117 Figure 8 3 Detail Stopping Mit spd s 0 src Start fwd src Enable Multispeed 1 Speed ref ms Brake close delay Cont open delay TT Spd 0 ref delay Multispeed 0 Acceleration MRO deceleration i i MIRO dec int jerk Sse MRO dec end jerk area Sto DE Lift Start mon BRAKE cont mon BRAKE 2 cont mon Lift Enable mon RUN cont mon Lift Landing mon FOC BRS only Lift DC brake mon V F only 118 Chapter 8 Lift Sequencies ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Figure 8 4 Relation between Direction Commands and Contactor Control Signals Start fwd src 9 G Q w Start rev src For details see Figure 83 For details see Figure 8 3 A Speed ref U
159. e fast fuses only Note Connections with three phase inductance on AC input are not essential but will improve the DC link capacitors lifetime Table 4 7 1 1 External Fuse Types for AC Input Side DC link 1 Fuses type code Drive type capacitors life Europe USA time h Connections without three phase reactor on AC input n GRD2 10 F4D13 ZI4GR10 F4M03 A70P10 57649 GRD2 16 F4D14 or ZI4GR16 F4M05 A70P20 S7G48 GRD2 20 F4D15 ZI4GR20 F4M07 A70P20 S7G48 GRD2 25 F4D16 ZI4GR25 4 09 70 25 2075 10000 GRD3 35 F4D20 2226640 70 35 FWP35 3110 25000 Z22GR63 F4M17 A70P60 FWP60 3150 10000 4185 81600 than 1 For these types an external reactor is mandatory if the AC input impedence is equal or less S7G51 S7G86 S7G88 Connections with three phase reactor on AC input A70P10 GRD2 10 F4D13 or ZI4GR10 F4M03 57649 A70P10 S7G49 GRD2 16 F4D14 Z14GR16 F4M05 A70P20 2040 50000 2055 50000 GRD2 20 F4D15 or Z14GR20 F4M07 ATOP20 FWP20 2075 50000 GRD2 25 F4D16 Z14GR25 F4M09 70 25 3110 50000 Z22GR63 F4M17 A70P60 FWP60 3150 50000 4185 4221 25000 150001 80 80 660 Z22gR80 A70P80 FWP80 75000 4301 4370 25000 or M00 f01 100A 660V A70P100 FWP100 25000 S00 f1 80 125A 660V A70P150 FWP150 5 2500 5008 25000 S00 f1 80 160A 660V or MO0 f01 160A 660V
160. e information about error messages and alarms please refer to section 10 Troubleshooting Press o to Exit from SETUP MODE menu Wait few seconds message sequence will follow Bus Please wait then Restart Please wait VA then 90 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual NZ Mechanical data WY ARTDrivel Instruction Manual R S MONITOR then Load setup Yes gt Ent No gt Esc Press to load Autotune data Busy Please wait then Load setup Yes gt Ent No gt Esc Press o to exit from menu Startup config Load setup Scroll o till Startup config Mechanical data Press to set Gearbox ratio Pulley diameter and Full scale speed of the system Travel unit sel Revolution Travel unit sel parameter determines all Speed and Ramp profile parameters units Revolution rpm rpm s and rpm s e Millimeters mm s mm s and mm s Gearbox ratio 35 00 de Press and set gearbox ratio of the system press to confirm Pulley diameter 500 mm de Press and set pulley diameter of the system press to confirm Full scale speed 1460 rpm de Press to edit max speed in lift application set this parameter to rated Chapter 7 Commissioning 91 motor speed press to confirm Nore It defines the 100 of the application speed referenced The absolute speed handling range is 200 Full scale s
161. e input signal of analog input 3 terminals 5 and 6 ON Q 20m 4 20m ERAN OFF 0 10 10 10 V S11 12 S13 Encoder setting jumpers on kit EAM 1618 supplied with the drive 0 S14 S15 S16 ON Sinusoidal SE or SESC encoder OFF Digital DE or DEHS encoder Monitoring of the C channel of the digital encoder ON C Channel monitored 95 OFF C Channel not monitored required for single ended channels 518 S19 Encoder setting S20 S21 Pos B digital DEHS encoder Pos A sinusoidal SESC encoder S22 23 Analog input 3 enabling alternative with SESC encoder Pos A if SESC encoder is used Pos B analog input 3 enabled Pos OFF resolver S26 827 Resover use enabling Pos ON when resolver is not used Pos OFF resolver Encoder Internal power supply selection ON ON OFF OFF 8 28 29 30 34 35 Jumper to disconnect OV 24V power supply from ground ON OV connected to ground hard wire OFF OV disconnected from ground Jumper to disconnect 0V regulation board from ground ON OV connected to ground hard wire OFF OV disconnected from ground 538 539 Inverter size setting ON ON Read size on power board OFF Read size on regulation board dip swi igurati i Power supply for the serial interface RS485 OFF ON Internal power supply from pins XS 5 XS 9 OFF External power supply to pins XS 5 XS 9 ALA060 FF FF FF A A ON A ON ON A S Second encoder qualifier inpu
162. e set by a single command Recipe files must be filled with parameters in the factory please contact drive manufacturer Available are 7 recipe files that are empty in default configuration Only parameters outside STARTUP menu can be put to recipe files Select recipe 1 User 1 2 User 2 3 User 3 4 User 4 5 User 5 6 User 6 7 User 7 STARTUP Save config AVyL drive allows two different commands to save the parameters modified in the regulation mode selected by STARTUP menu Save Config command by all other menus SAVE PARAMETERS command Any changes made in STARTUP menu require Save Config command which saves all entire regulation mode selected It is recommended every time the user made any changes into STARTUP menu SAVE PARAMETERS command saves all the changes made out of STARTUP menu only When on the keypad display appears blinking message Use Save Config use Save Config command ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 137 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode TRAVEL Speed profile The parameters unit is defined by IPA 1015 in STARTUP Startup config Mechanical data menu changing the IPA 1015 setting from 0 Revolutions default to 1 Millimeters the units in this menu change as follows rpm becomes mm s rpm s becomes mm s rpm s becomes mm s 7110 Smooth start spd rpm RWS 0 Calc Calc PP V F S B Smooth
163. ed on the number of attempts Voltage on the drive DC link is lower than the minimum threshold for the given Mains voltage setting Overvoltage Disable drive No Yes Yes 23 3 Voltage on the drive DC link is higher than the maximum threshold for the given Mains voltage setting IGBT desat flt Disable drive No Yes Yes 24 4 No more than 2 attempts in 30 seconds IGBT instantaneous overcurrent was detected by gate desaturation sensing circuit Inst Overcurrent Disable drive No Yes Yes 25 5 No more than 2 attempts 30sec IGBT instantaneous overcurrent was detected by output current sensor Ground fault Programmable No No Yes 26 6 Output phase discharge to ground Curr fbk loss Disable drive No No No 27 7 A failure of current sensor feeedback or power supply was detected External fault Programmable Programmable Yes Programm 28 8 External fault input is active Spd fbk loss Programmable No No No 29 9 A failure of the speed feedback sensor or power supply was detected Module OT Disable drive Constant 10 msec No No 30 10 IGBT overtemperature was detected by internal sensor models 0 75 to 20 Hp only Heatsink OT Disable drive Constant 1000 msec No No 31 11 Heatsink overtemperature was detected by thermal contact only for models 18 5 kW and over Motor OT Programmable Programmable Yes Programm 32 12 Motor overtemperature was detected by thermal contact or PTC thermistor Heatsink S OT Program
164. eed parameter as following Rated speed Synchronous speed Slip 710 Rated power kW RW D Size Calc Calc FK V F S Motor rated power Nore For a motor nameplate rated in Hp set Rated power KW motor Hp rating 0 736 720 Cosfi N A RW D Size Calc Calc FK V F S Motor rated power factor 730 Efficiency N A RW D Size Calc Calc FK V F S Motor Efficiency if not available leave the default data Load default mot It selects and loads the motor standard parameters 0 Standard 400V 1 Standard 460V Nore selecting one of the two options the motor standard parameters with 400V or 460V are loaded making reference to the used Drive size Through this process motor data is overwritten SETUP MODE Motor data for AVy BR series 670 Rated voltage V RW D Size Calc FK V F S B Motor rated voltage 690 Rated current A RW D Size Calc FK V F S B Motor rated current Nore value should be not less then approx 0 3 times the drive rated current output current Class 1 400V on the drive nameplate 700 Rated speed rpm RW D Size Calc FK V F S B Motor synchronous speed 930 Pole pairs N A RW 4 0 0 0 0 0 FK B Must be integer number 990 Torque constant Nm A RW D Size 0 0 0 0 FK B Motor torque costant This parameter is usually stated by the motor manufacturer If not it can be calculated from motor rated power speed and current as P W Torque Constant 2x
165. el p 140 Sequencer status p 123 SERVICE p 205 Service factor p 135 Sfbk der base p 145 Sfbk der enable p 144 Sfbk der filter p 145 Sfbk der gain p 145 SFL activity p 188 SGP tran21 band p 146 SGP tran21 h thr p 146 SGP tran32 band p 146 SGP tran32 thr p 146 ave address p 191 ave res time p 191 ip comp p 152 ip comp filter p 152 ip comp mode p 152 ip gain p 152 ip P gain p 152 owDown dist p 140 s SpdFbk gains p 156 Smooth start spd p 138 Smooth str time p 140 Software status p 125 Software type p 125 Software version V p 125 Spd 0 dis dly p 160 C0 Spd 0 enable p 144 Spd 01 gain p 144 Spd 0 P gain p 144 Spd 0 ref delay p 145 Spd 0 ref thr p 145 Spd 0 spd delay p 145 Spd 0 speed thr p 145 Spd fbk loss p 188 Spd ref fbk res p 126 Spd regulator p 152 Spdl base value p 152 Spdl1 gain p 144 152 Spdl2 gain p 144 Spdl3 gain p 144 SpdP base value p 152 SpdP1 gain p 144 152 SpdP2 gain p 144 SpdP3 gain p 144 SpdReg gain calc p 134 Speed fbk sel p 131 Speed profile p 138 Speed ref p 122 Speed ref 1 mon p 150 Speed ref 1 src p 150 Speed ref 2 mon p 151 Speed ref 2 src p 150 Speed ref cfg p 150 Speed ref mon p 150 Speed reg gains p 142 Speed setpoint p 150 Speed threshold p 145 Speedref inv src p 150 Start alt src p 140 Start cmd mon p 160 Start fwd src p 140 Start rev src p 140 Start SM mon p 122 STARTUP p 126 Stator resistance p 127 Std dig enc mode p 1
166. elease will wait until this input is asserted During run brake will be closed whenever this input becomes not asserted TRAVEL Speed reg gains Allows to change speed regulation gain according to speed reference Typically at low speed high gains are required to have good starting behavior At high speed lower gains are preferred to suppress eventual vibrations due to mechanical imperfections In case that values above 100 are required to achieve desired speed response increase gains base values in menu REGULATION PARAM Spd regulator Base values IPA 2075 and 2077 When base values are increased percentage values are reduced such that resulting gain used by regulator preserves original value At this point percentage values can be increased Nore Bands and Thr can be set in TRAVEL Speed threshold menu Default configuration Spd 0 enable Disable only parameters 21 are set Gains 1 are used for middle accel decel and high speed Gains 2 are used at low speed starting and approach speed Gain 4 SGP tran 21 band 1 P Spd P2 gain Spd P1 gain qpee 2d 2 2 p5294 Spd I2 gain npemd e cimsmentesedeuehdr S Spd M gan 4 1 1 1 D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Speedref 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Speedref K SGP
167. ent the oscilloscope s chassis should be grounded and a differential amplifier input should be used Care should be used in the selection of probes and leads and in the adjustment of the oscilloscope so that accu rate readings may be made See instrument manufacturer s instruction book for proper operation and adjustments to the instrument D charge lectrique et Risque de Brilure Lors de l utilisation d instruments par example oscilloscope sur des syst mes en marche le chassis de l oscilloscope doit tre reli la terre et un amplificateur diff rentiel devrait tre utilis en entr e Les sondes et conducteurs doivent tre choissis avec soin pour effectuer les meilleures mesures l aide d un oscilloscope Voir le manuel d instruction pour une utilisation correcte des instruments Fire and Explosion Hazard Fires or explosions might result from mounting Drives in hazardous areas such as locations where flammable or combustible vapors or dusts are present Drives should be installed away from hazardous areas even if used with motors suitable for use in these locations Risque d incendies et d explosions L utilisation des drives dans des z nes risques pr sence de vapeurs ou de poussi res inflammables peut provoquer des incendies ou des explo sions Les drives doivent tre install s loin des z nes dangeureuses et quip s de moteurs appropri s ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter O Safety Precautions
168. er Table 4 8 1 1 3 Phase AC Input Chokes STAAF STAAG 2055 2075 3110 3150 785 421 4300 1301 4370 4371 He LR3 055 S7FF1 5550 260 LR3 090 S7D19 7900 71100 71320 LR3 160 S7D40 81600 TAVy4135 Note The current rating of these inductors reactors is based on the nominal current of standard motors listed in table 2 3 4 1 4 8 2 Output Chokes The AVy Drive can be used with general purpose standard motors or with motors specially designed for Drive use The latter usually have a higher isolation rating to better withstand PWM voltage Follow example of reference regulation Low voltage general purpose standard motors VDE 0530 max peak voltage 1 max dV dt 500 V us NEMA MGI part 30 max peak voltage 1kV min rise time 2us Low voltage motors for use on inverters NEMA MGI part 31 max peak voltage 1 6 min rise time 0 1 us 56 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Norte Note ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Motors designed for use with Adjustable Frequency Drives do not require any specific filtering of the voltage waveform from the Drive For general purpose motors and using drives up to 2075 size especially with long cable runs typically over 100 m 328 feet an output choke is recommended to mantain the voltage waveform within the specified limits Suggested choke ratings and part numbers are listed in table 5 7 2 1 The rated current of the filters should be approx 2
169. ertia p 129 otor OL control p 135 otor OL factor p 135 otor OL time p 135 otor OT p 184 otor overload p 188 otor pp sens pp p 134 otor protection p 135 otoring gains p 156 RO acc end jerk p 139 RO acc ini jerk p 139 RO acceleration p 139 RO dec end jerk p 139 RO dec ini jerk p 139 RO deceleration p 139 RO end decel p 139 R1 acc end jerk p 139 M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M 1 acc ini jerk p 139 MR1 acceleration p 139 MR1 dec end jerk p 140 MR1 dec ini jerk p 140 MR1 deceleration p 140 end decel p 140 Multi speed 0 p 138 ulti speed 1 p 138 ulti speed 2 p 138 ulti speed 3 p 138 ulti speed 4 p 138 ulti speed 5 p 138 ulti speed 6 p 138 Multi speed 7 p 138 zzzzzz Norm Exp enc spd p 123 Norm Speed p 122 Norm Std enc spd p 123 0 Observer filter p 157 Observer ref mon p 157 OS activity p 188 OS hold off p 188 OS threshold p 188 Out vlt ref cfg p 156 Out vit ref mon p 156 Out vit ref src p 156 Output current p 122 Output power p 122 Output vlt ref p 156 Output voltage p 122 Outvlt lim src p 156 OV restart p 183 OV restart time p 183 Overspeed p 188 Overvoltage p 183 P Pad 0 p 201 Pad 1 p 201 Pad 10 p 202 Pad 11 p 202 Pad 12 p 202 Pad 13 p 202 Pad 14 p 202 Pad 15 p 202 Pad 2 p 201 Pad 3 p 201 Pad 4 p 202 Pad 5 p 202 Pad 6 p 202 Pad 7 p 202 Pad 8 p 202 Pad 9 p 202 Pad param bit p 202 Pa
170. es encoder e Adaptive speed regulation e Speed related alarms Simple operation of the drive can be via the terminal strip the user friendly keypad the PC program supplied and the RS485 serial interface fieldbus connection optional INTERBUS S PROFIBUS DP GENIUS CANopen or DeviceNet The Drives are fitted with IGBTs insulated gate bipolar transistors The output is protected against ground fault and phase to phase output short circuit Regulator power supply via switched mode power supply unit from the DC Bus circuit Power supply backup in the event of short term voltage dips Galvanic isolation between control section and command terminals Analog inputs designed as differential inputs 14 Chapter 1 Functions and General Features ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 1 2 Motors The AVy Drives designed for the field oriented regulation of standard three phase induction AC motors A sinusoidal encoder or digital encoder can be used for feedback in proportion to speed The electrical and mechanical data of standard three phase motors refers to a particular operating range The following points should be noted when these motors are connected to an AC Drive Is it possible to use standard induction motors With the AVy Drives it is possible to use standard induction motors Some features of the motor have a great influence on the obtained performances Notice also what is stated in section 2 3 2 AC Output
171. esistor and smoothing capacitor Direct voltage V2 x Mains voltage U 5 IGBT inverter Converts direct voltage to a variable three phase alternating voltage with variable frequency 6 Configurable control section Modules for open loop and closed loop control of the power section This is used for processing control commands reference values and actual values 7 Output voltage Three phase variable alternating voltage 8 Encoder For speed feedback see section 3 4 2 Ly ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 2 Inspection procedures Components Identification and Std Specs 19 2 3 Standard Specifications 2 3 1 Permissible Environmental Conditions ENVIRONMENT T Ambient temperature C ____ 0 40 40 50 with derating T Ambient temperature F 32 104 104 122 with derating Installation location Pollution degree 2 or better free from direct sunlight vibration dust corrosive or inflammable gases fog vapour oil and dripped water avoid saline environment Degree of protection IP20 IP54 for the cabinet with externally mounted heatsink size type 1007 to 3150 Installation altitude Up to 1000 m 3280 feet above sea level for higher altitudes a current reduction of 1 296 for every 100 m 328 feet of additional height applies Temperature operation 0 40 C 32 104 operation 0 50 C 32 122 F storage 25 55 C 13 131 F class 1K4 as per EN50178 20
172. ested power of the resistor respecting the limit of the internal braking unit reported intable 4 9 2 3 or an external BU if necessary In order to protect these resistors from dangerous overload software overload control logic is also available STARTUP Startup config BU protection The default parameters in the drive match the recomended resistor paring as for the table 4 9 2 1 For no standard paring resistor see STARTUP Startup config BU protection ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 61 Table 4 9 2 2 Braking Thresholds for Different Mains Mai lt Braking threshold ains voltage 2 Ver V 400Vae ET Fac AB 780 avy4200 When the duty cycle exceeds the data entered the alarm BU overload automatically occurs in order to prevent possible damages to the resistor The following table can be used to choose an external resistor different from the standard series Table 4 9 2 3 Technical Data of the Internal Braking Units Inverter type Pu External braking unit optional Tavy4210 I Nominal current of the braking unit I Peak current deliverable for 60 seconds max Minimum cycle time for a working at I for 10 seconds Generally the following condition must be satisfed D P Tir 2 Rir Te Each drive is provided of the terminals 26 and 27 which allows control of one or more external braking units parallel connected The drive w
173. eter gt Gearbox ratio Rope weight Motor Gearbox Pulley Car weight i Load weight Counter weight STARTUP Startup config Landing zone 9411 Landing control N A RWZ 0 0 1 DP F B 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Enable Disable of accurate position control in landing zone 9419 Landing init src N A RWSZ 7124 List3 F B IPA 7124 Lift Landing mon Default It allows to select the signal to initialize the close loop position control in the Landing Zone leave to default if landing should be managed by internal lift control sequence refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual 9412 Landing distance nm RWZ 100 10 1000 PP F B Total distance between landing zone signal and floor position Higher value allows faster positioning 9420 Landing ratio RWZ 50 0 90 PP F B Percentage of landing distance during which car runs at constant speed 9417 Pos P gain RWZ 1 0 100 PP F B Proportional gain of position regulator 130 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 9410 Pos speed limit rpm RWZ 200 0 Calc F B Maximum speed allowed to use by position controller Lift car Landing init src Landing distance Floor level Landing distance Landing sensor Landing sensor output can be interfaced to the drive through digital input which can become command to initialize landing control Speed
174. f a three phase supply not symmetrical to ground an insulation loss of one of the devices connected to the same network can cause functional problem to the drive if the use of a wye delta transformer is avoided The drives are designed to be powered from standard three phase lines that are electrically symmetrical with respect to ground TN or TT network 2 Incase of supply with IT network the use of wye delta transformer is mandatory with a secondary three phase wiring referred to ground Please refer to the following connection sample Si le r seau n est pas quilibr par rapport la terre et qu il n y a pas de transformateur raingle toile une mauvaise isolation d un appareil lectrique connect au m me r seau que le variateur peut lui causer ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter O Safety Precautions 9 des troubles de fonctionnement 1 Les variateurs sont pr vus pour tre aliment s par un r seau triphas quilibr avec un r gime de neutre standard TN ou TT 2 Sile r gime de neutre est IT nous vous recommendons d utiliser un tranformateur triangle toile avec point milieu ramen la terre Vous pouvez trouver ci apr s des exemples de c blage eor NS ees NAN gt m gt AC INPUT AC Main Supply All wires in
175. fthr rpm RWS 30 0 0 PP V F S B Speed 0 reference threshold 3727 Spd 0 ref delay ms RWS 500 0 30000 PP V F S B Speed 0 reference delay A Speed ref Ref is zero Ref is zero dly 1 Spd 0 ref delay _ gt 1 1 Brake cont mon 1 0 Nore Ref is zero and Ref is zero dly signals are available in the pick lists of the digital outputs Brake cont mon signal is available a digital relay output 83 85 terminals 3724 Spd 0 speed thr rpm RWS 30 0 0 PP V F S B Speed 0 speed threshold 3725 Spd 0 spd delay ms RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V F S B Speed 0 speed delay ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 145 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode A Norm Speed Speed 0 spd thr Spd is zero 0 1 1 Spd 0 spd delay 1 L 1 0 Spd is zero dly 1 1 Lo 0 1 Nore is zero and Spd is zero dly signals are available in the pick lists of the digital and analog outputs 3706 SGP tran21 h thr RWS 15 0 100 PP F S B See Possible Default configuration figures on TRAVEL Speed reg gains menu 3707 SGP tran32 I thr RWS 0 0 100 PP F S B See Possible Default configuration figures on TRAVEL Speed reg gains menu 3708 SGP tran21 band RWS 10 0 100 PP F S B See Possible Default configuration figures on TRAVEL Speed reg gains menu 370
176. g the input combination of multispeed function 140 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode Mit spd s 0 1 2 sources refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual 7073 Mitspds 1 src N A RWS 4025 List3 V F S B DI 5 monitor Default It allows to select the origin of the signals stating the input combination of multispeed function spd s 0 1 2 sources refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual 7074 Mitspds2src N A RWS 4025 List3 V F S B DI 6 monitor Default It allows to select the origin of the signals stating the input combination of multispeed function spd s 0 1 2 sources refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual Mtl spd sel 2 src Mtl spd sel 1 src Mtl spd sel 0 src ACTIVE RAMP REF 0 0 0 Multi speed 0 0 0 1 Multi speed 1 0 1 0 Multi speed 2 0 1 1 Multi speed 3 1 0 0 Multi speed 4 1 0 1 Multi speed 5 1 1 0 Multi speed 6 1 1 1 Multi speed 7 7069 Mit spd sel mon N A R 0 0 7 DP V F S B Active selection displaying Multispeed 0 Multispeed 1 etc 7070 spd out mon rpm R 0 00 000 000 PV V F S B It displays multispeed block output signal 8090 Mit ramp sel src N A RWS 4000 List3 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to select the origin of the signals stating Multi ramp input combination Mit ramp s0 1 src refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual Mu
177. gain at low speed 3720 Spd 0 enable N A RWS 0 0 1 DP F S B Apart from gain adaptive function it is possible to have another set of gains when speed reference is below Speed 0 reference threshold parameter Function must be enabled by this parameter 0 Disable 1 Enable as spd 0 2 Enable as start from software rel 3 300 3722 Spd 0 P gain RWS Calc 0 100 PP F S B Proportional speed 0 regulator gain at zero speed 3723 Spd 0 gain RWS Calc 0 100 PP F S B Integral speed 0 regulator gain at zero speed 2530 Sfbk der enable N A RWSZ 0 0 1 DV F S B Speed feedback derivative function enable disable 144 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 0 Disable 1 Enable Speed ref Speed regulator Sfbk der enable Le Norm Speed Enable Speed feedback derivative 1 S T1 T1 Sfbk der gain Sfbk der base 1 S T2 T2 Sfbk der filter Disable 2540 Sfbk der gain RWS 0 100 100 PV F S B Speed feedback derivative gain 2550 Sfbk der base ms RWS 10000 0 10000 F S B Base feedback derivative gain 2560 Sfbk der filter ms RWS 5 0 1000 PP F S B Speed feeedback derivative filter 2380 Prop filter ms RWS 1 5 0 15 1000 F S B Filter on the proportional part of torque reference Can be used to suppress the noise TRAVEL Speed threshold 3726 SpdOre
178. ge The new address becomes active after the Drive has been switched off and then back on A temporary address change is also possible when using the Slink4 protocol with an Slink4 command When using the Slink4 protocol the RS485 serial line operates in half duplex where the data cannot be transmitted and received simultaneously It is sometimes possible during the transition from transmission to reception modes the Master PC or PLC reaches the reception condition after the Drive has already started to send its data package As a consequence the package received by the master is not correct In order to avoid such occurrences the Slave res time parameter can be adjusted to delay the drive response so the Master has sample mode switching time This situation does not occur with the Modbus and Jbus protocols as the synchronization pause between messages is specified by the protocol and is guaranteed SBI The communication with the SBI Field Bus option cards Serial Bus Interface is performed via two channels Synchronous or Process channel PDC Process Data Channel for a cyclical value interchange Asynchronous or Configuration channel for a low priority access to all the Drive parameters As for the data exchange modes between the SBI card and the Network see the SBI card documentation The process data exchange between the Drive and the SBI has the following structure the interface is made of six writing Words and six reading Words
179. gt P floattype D digitaltype Integer with 16 bits B cantobe gt parameter gt V variable gt constant PIN parameter type is enumerative It has therefore a list of possible values for example it is a source ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 121 IPA 9 2 Parameter Description Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode This menu displays a series of variables useful to check the Drive state The variable function is clearly explained by the variable name Monitor 3060 Output voltage V R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV V F S B Voltage on the drive output terminals 3070 Output current A R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV V F S B Current on the drive output terminals 3080 Output frequency Hz R 0 00 000 000 PV V F S B Drive output frequency 3090 Output power R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV V F S B Drive output power UNIT kW for AVy AC AC4 for AVy BR BR4 9405 Norm Speed rpm R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV V F S B Speed of the motor 3210 Speed ref rpm R 0 00 0 00 000 PV V F S B Drive speed reference 3200 Ramp ref rpm R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PV V F S B Drive ramp reference 162 Enable SM mon N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B It shows the drive Enable state 163 Start SM mon N A R 0 0 1 DV It shows the drive Start state 0 OFF 1 ON 164 FastStop SM mon N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B It shows the drive FastStop state 0 OFF 1 ON MONITOR I
180. gt SBI W src 9010 SBI WO src N A RWS 9020 List 40 PIN V F S B IPA 9020 Int Drv SBI WO Default It allows to select the origin of Word 0 to be transmitted from Drive to SBI card refer to signals List 40 of Pick List manual 9011 Drv SBI W1 src N A RWS 9021 List 40 PIN V F S B IPA 9021 Int Drv SBI W1 Default It allows to select the origin of Word 1 to be transmitted from Drive to SBI card refer to signals List 40 of Pick List manual 9012 SBI W2 src N A RWS 9022 List 40 PIN V F S B IPA 9022 Int Drv SBI W2 Default It allows to select the origin of Word 2 to be transmitted from Drive to SBI card refer to signals List 40 of Pick List manual 9013 SBI W3 src N A RWS 9023 List 40 PIN V F S B 9023 Int Drv SBI W3 Default It allows to select the origin of Word 3 to be transmitted from Drive to SBI card refer to signals List 40 of Pick List manual 9014 SBI W4 src N A RWS 9024 List 40 PIN V F S B IPA 9024 Int Drv SBI W4 Default It allows to select the origin of Word 4 to be transmitted from Drive to SBI card refer to signals List 40 of Pick List manual 9015 Drv SBI W5 src N A RWS 9025 List 40 PIN V F S B IPA 9025 Int Drv SBI W5 Default It allows to select the origin of Word 5 to be transmitted from Drive to SBI card refer to signals List 40 of Pick List manual COMMUNICATION Drv gt SBI word Drv gt SBI W cfg 9020 Int Drv SBI WO N A RWS 000 PV V F S B Inter
181. gure 3 2 3 Example for External Connection sisse intet ttt tnnt tente ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Table of Contents 3 3 3 Installation Mounting Clearance sse ennt 34 Figure 3 31 Max Angle of Ineliation rar tele ven tno run 34 Figure 3 9 2 Mounting GIG alan Ce ats p 34 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure esssssssesseseseeeeeee enne nenn eene 35 4 1 Accessing the Connectors iere eripe en BECHER HERE EHE Hee E e TERR 35 4 1 1 Removing the Covers 35 Figure 4 1 1 Removing the Covers Sizes 1007 to 3150 Figure 4 1 2 Removing the Covers Sizes 4185 to 81600 12 Power Section oe ete ie ead inne ees 36 4 2 1 Terminal Assignment on Power Section Cable Cross Section sss 37 Table 4 2 1 1 Power Section Terminals from 1007 to 3150 22 Table 4 2 1 2 Power Section Terminals from 4185 to 81600 37 Table 4 2 1 3 Maximum Cable Cross Section for Power Terminals 38 Table 4 2 1 4 Maximum Permissible Cable Cross section on the Plug in Terminals of the Regulator Section 39 Table 4 2 1 5 Maximum Control Cable Lengths sisse tnnt 4 3 Regulation Section sssini ac cti a ete Y td e Pc a RR nds 4 3 1 RV33 4 Regulation Card Switch amp Jumpers sees Table 4 3 1 1 LEDs amp Test points on Regula
182. hat will be input to decomposing block refer to signals List 27 of Pick List manual 1 0 CONFIG Word gt Bits Word1 gt Bits cfg 9360 1 decomp inp N A RWS 0X0000 DV V F S B It allows to set the W1 decomp inp value 1 0 CONFIG gt Bits Word1 Bits mon 9362 1 decomp mon N A R 0 0 DP V F S B Monitor of the hexadecimal input value of the Word 1 decomposed 9363 Wi decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 0 of Word 1 decomposed displaying 9364 B1 W1 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 1 of Word 1 decomposed displaying 9365 2 W1 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 2 of Word 1 decomposed displaying 9366 W1 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 3 of Word 1 decomposed displaying 180 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 9367 B4 W1 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 4 of Word 1 decomposed displaying 9368 5 W1 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 5 of Word 1 decomposed displaying 9369 B6 W1 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 6 of Word 1 decomposed displaying 9370 B7 W1 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 7 of Word 1 decomposed displaying 9371 B8 W1 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 8 of Word 1 decomposed displaying 9372 B9 W1 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 9 of Word 1 decomposed displaying 9373 B10W1 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 10 of Word 1 decomposed display
183. he Block supplies two signal Comparators Compare 1 and Compare 2 with the same features Each Comparator is in a position to compare two or three input signals INPO INP1 INP2 Some comparisons allow to set via Cmp x window a window in count stating an acceptable range among the signals Example INPO and INP1 have to be compared as INPO INP1 INPO 1000count INP1 1000count Window 100count In this case the equality is true for a maximum overall variation of INP1 between 1100 and 900 counts Possible variations None none 0 INPO window lt INP1 lt INPO window 10 1 1 INP1 lower INPO window INP1 higher INPO window I0 lt I INPO lower INP1 10 gt 11 INPO higher INP1 10 lt It gt 12 INPO lt INP1 lt INP2 INP1 included between 0 INPO window lt INP1 lt INPO window 10 1 INP1 lower INPO window or INP1 higher INPO window 10 lt H INPO lower INP1 0 gt IH INPO higher INP1 10 lt 1 lt 12 INPO lt INP1 lt INP2 INP1 10 AND 11 AND 12 AND logic between 10 I1 and 12 10 OR 11 OR 12 OR logic between 10 I1 and 12 10 H logic between IO 11 CUSTOM FUNCTIONS Compare Compare 1 CUSTOM FUNCTIONS Compare Compare 1 Compare 1 src 6049 1 inp 0 src N A RWS 6041 List5 V F S B IPA 6041 Cmp 1 inp 0 Default It allows to select the origin of the input signal 0 to be com
184. hold off ms RWS 0 0 30000 PP V F S B Overspeed hold off ALARM CONFIG Spd fbk loss It trips when the speed feedback is not detected or encoder supply failed 9042 SFL activity N A RWS 3 1 6 DP 1 Ignore 2 Warning 3 Disable drive 4 Stop 5 Fast stop 6 Curr limstp Spd fbk loss activity 188 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode ALARM CONFIG UV repetitive It trips when more than a programmable number with UVR attempts parameter of Undervoltage faults are detected in 4 minutes time programmable with UVR delay parameter 9043 UVR attempts N A RWS 5 1 1000 It determines the number of Undervoltage faults accepted 9044 UVR delay sec RWS 240 1 262 14 PP V F S B It determines the time window of UVR attempts parameter ALARM CONFIG Hw fault It trips when the communication between drive regulation card and one of its option cards in not detected 4202 Hw fault mon N A R 0 0 0 DP V F S B 0 communication OK 1 communication failed ALARM CONFIG Alarm status The alarm state can be reported via three Words Each bit determines an alarm state It is therefore possible to determine the state of 48 alarms Each single bit can be controlled if the corresponding bit of a specific mask is set with 1 otherwise their setting is always 0 When an alarm becomes active the word corres
185. ication e Fan control logic function only for sizes AVy2040AC4 up to AVy5550AC4 BR4 Chapter 1 Functions and General Features 13 Fan control logic function allows to run internal inverter fans only when the drive is enabled Fan control logic function signal is also repeated on the drive power board FEXT terminals for an auxiliary external fan e Emergency Module Supply Emergency Module Supply control EMS or MW22U allows emergency lift maneuvres auxiliary battery pack is required Both devices must be signal interfaced with drive power board EM terminal Please refer to EMS or MW22U user manual for technical specification e Easy of use menu Menus with elevator terminology separated for MONITORing motor STARTUP and TRAVEL settings Drive features e Self tuning procedure for current flux and speed regulators automatic phasing for brushless motors Space vector modulation keeps the noise level to a minimum Switching frequencies selectable 2 4 8 12 16 kHz Output voltage up to 98 of input voltage Fault register storing the last 30 fault alarms with the associated lifetime Overload protection for drive motor and brake unit Three freely configurable analog inputs on the standard device Expansion of the analog digital outputs and analog digital inputs via option cards EXP D8R4 EXP D14A4F Speed and torque current regulation possible e Management of many different types of speed feeedback devic
186. ide a Menu 5 down up MAIN MENU Escape from MONITOR croll Scroll Enter to Enter to MONITOR menu p OUTPUT VOLT AGE 340V STARTUP menu Escape from STARTUP Escape from STARTUP Qo STARTUP Regulation mode STARTUP Save config R S STARTUP ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 7N Output current 0 00A SHIFT HELP Busy Please wait Help max value 0 000 Help min value 0 000 Help mode ZUSWR 1 Chapter 6 Keypad Operation 71 6 4 Drive Main Menu m OR UP Drive status variables MONIT Drive amp Motor initial setup Lift mechanical data START Lift parameters R E REGUL ATION PARAM v 8 FIG wv R ALARM CONFIG Password v LEVEL 1 Regulator gain amp control parameters R Input Output amp commands 1 0 CON configurations Alarm configurations 8 UNICATION wv 8 ARD CONFIG wv R CUSTOM FUNCTIONS R COMM Serial link communication card R APPL C Application card configurations Signal compare blocks Programmable block area amp PAD configurations Password Service purpose menu with LEVEL 2 password SERVICE menu allows the setting of the password to enable Level 1 drive menus 12345
187. if Ramp out enable Disabled amp Start t Switch is opened if Ramp out enable Disabled amp Stan Orpm 2 Switch is closed if Ramp out enable Disabled amp Switch is opened if Ramp out enable Disabled rast Both switches are closed if Ramp out enable Enabled SAVE PARAMETERS AVyL drive allows two different commands to save the parameters modified in the regulation mode selected by STARTUP menu Save Config command by all other menus SAVE PARAMETERS command Any changes made in STARTUP menu require Save Config command which saves all entire regulation mode selected It is recommended every time the user made any changes into STARTUP menu SAVE PARAMETERS command saves all the changes made out of STARTUP menu only When on the keypad display appears blinking message Use Save Config use Save Config command ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 151 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode REGULATION PARAM Most of the parameters in this menu are initialized by autotune procedure The access to REGULATION PARAM menu is allowed by Level 1 password 12345 It must to be set in the SERVICE menu REGULATION PARAM V f reg param 3400 Voltage boost RWS Calc 0 00 0 00 PV Torque boost at low speed It allows to increase the output voltage at zero Hz Initialized by autotune procedure
188. ill act as Master and the external braking units BU32 must be configured as Slave In this way it will be possible to utilize the internal P t protection If more than one BU is used each BU shall be connected to a single resistor All Braking Unit shall be the same model and have same type resistor Das gt 62 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 4 10 Buffering the Regulator Supply The power supply of the control section is provided by a switched mode power supply unit SMPS from the DC Link circuit The drive is disabled as soon as the voltage of the DC Link circuit is below the threshold value The regulator supply is buffered by the energy of the DC Link circuit Buff until the limit value is reached The buffer time is determined by the capacitance of the DC Link capacitors The minimum values are shown in the table below The buffer time t can be extended only on 11 kW drive and higher by connecting external capacitors in parallel on terminal C and D Table 4 10 1 DC Link Buffer Time Buffer time Maximum Maximum Internal minimum value with the permissible power required Inverter type capacitance internal capacitance at external by switched AC Input AC Input AC Input capacitance mode power Coa voltage 230V voltage 400V voltage 460V supply uF s s s Cot uF Psmrs W 0 02 0 165 1005 220 0 0 165 0 08 024 0 08 024 0 08 0 60 0 08 063 0 08 0
189. ill be initialized If the operation generates any error messages or alarm led comes on please check consistency of motor parameters and try again or see specific directions in section 10 Troubleshooting Scroll v to perform Autotune procedure two options can be used for this procedure Complete still or Complete rot Nore When motor is coupled to gearbox and lift is installed use Complete still motor still When motor is uncoupled or gearbox does not represent more than 5 of load and lift car is not installed use Complete rot motor in rotation Warnine Option Complete still may also cause limited shaft rotation Chapter 7 Commissioning 79 Warning Option Complete rot causes motor shaft rotation close to rated speed It is preferred one for the higher accuracy but it requires free uncoupled rotation of the motor shaft SETUP MODE Autotune Select the desired option scroll or Complete still Start or Complete rot Start o As standard example with motor and machine installed on system Complete still are used Connect terminal 12 Enable to terminal 19 24VDC through relays or local switch switch on the output contactors and leave the brake closed Complete still Start Complete still Press Key press C to start Nore Autotune can be aborted at any time by pressing The Autotune procedure will start the drive will display from C
190. ing 9374 B11W1 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 11 of Word 1 decomposed displaying 9375 B12 W1 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 12 of Word 1 decomposed displaying 9376 B13 W1 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 13 of Word 1 decomposed displaying 9377 B14 W1 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 14 of Word 1 decomposed displaying 9378 B15 W1 decomp N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Bit 15 of Word 1 decomposed displaying SAVE PARAMETERS AVyL drive allows two different commands to save the parameters modified in the regulation mode selected by STARTUP menu Save Config command by all other menus SAVE PARAMETERS command Any changes made in STARTUP menu require Save Config command which saves all entire regulation mode selected It is recommended every time the user made any changes into STARTUP menu SAVE PARAMETERS command saves all the changes made out of STARTUP menu only When on the keypad display appears blinking message Use Save Config use Save Config command ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 181 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode ALARM CONFIG The access to ALARM CONFIG menu is allowed by Level 1 password 12345 It must to be set in the SERVICE menu In the ALARM CONFIG menu it is possible to configure Drive alarms behavior through the following functions Activity It allows to set the action to be performed after the alarm in
191. inimum value and execute Start command Al 1 gain tune Start Autotune command for the Analog Input 1 gain Conditions containing an offset can be compensated To run the autotune put the input signal to its maximum value and execute Start command Analog inputs Std analog inps Analog input 1 An inp 1 mon 5009 1 output cnt R 0 00 32768 32767 PV V F S B Analog Input 1 output count displaying 5010 Aninp 1 lt thr N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Display of threshold compensator state of Analog Input 1 1 the condition is true 5001 An inp 1 offset cnt RWS 0 16384 16383 PP V F S B Analog Input 1 offset count value displaying 5005 1 gain N A RWS 1 16 16 PP V F S B Analog Input 1 gain count value displaying Analog inputs Std analog inps Analog input 2 An inp 2 src 5031 Al2sgnsrc WA RWS 4000 List3 PIN V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It connects the selected signal to the selector of the multiplier input if the signal is 0 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 161 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode multiply by 7 or if the signal is T multiply by 1 The multiplier allows to invert Analog Input 2 signa refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual 5032 AI2 alt sel src N A RWS IPA4000List3 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It connects the selected signal to the selector of the alternative reference for
192. ion is interrupted coprocessor communication between drive and APC 100 optional card 9049 activity N A RWS 3 2 6 DP V F S B 2 Warning 3 Disable drive 4 Stop 5 Fast stop 6 A Curr limstp ppl card fault activity ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 187 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode ALARM CONFIG Drive overload It trips when Drive overload accumulator exceeded trip threshold 9040 DOL activity N A RWS 1 1 6 DP V F S B Ignore Warning Disable drive Stop Fast stop Curr limstp Drive overload activity O O1 BR OC NO ALARM CONFIG Motor overload It trips when Motor overload accumulator exceeded trip threshold 9041 MOL activity N A RWS 2 1 6 DP V F S B Ignore Warning Disable drive Stop Fast stop Curr limstp O1 BR ALARM CONFIG BU overload It trips when Brake resistor overload accumulator exceeded trip threshold 9071 BUOL activity N A RWS 3 1 6 DP 2 Warning 3 Disable drive 4 Stop 5 Fast stop 6 Curr limstp Braking Unit overload activity ALARM CONFIG Overspeed It trips when the speed of the motor exceeded speed limit threshold 9220 OS activity N A RWS 3 1 6 DP V F S B 2 Warning 3 Disable drive 4 Stop 5 Fast stop 6 Curr limstp Overspeed activity 9221 OS threshold rmp RWS Calc 0 00 8192 PP V F S B Overspeed threshold 9608 OS
193. is not allowed The intervention time depends on the value of the motor current as follows Motor Rated current Service factor Motor OL factor 2 Motor OL time Overload tiie o Motor current 2 It is possible to generate an alarm condition or reduce eventual overload current to nominal current of the motor For various options of alarm configuration see menu ALARM CONFIG Motor overload 1612 Motor OL control N A RW 0 0 1 DK 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Enable disable motor current limit control and overload 12t protection function from software rel 3 300 1611 Service factor N A RW 1 0 5 1 5 FK V F S B Service factor Some motors have a motor continuous current Ic higher than the rated current In The service factor makes reference to the Ic In ratio 1610 Motor OL factor N A RW 2 1 2 Calc V F S B Allowed motor overload factor referring to the Motor rated current Service factor 1650 Motor OL time sec RW 30 10 Calc V F S B Allowed overload time with overload level equal to Motor OL factor ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 135 IPA Description it Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 300 250 2 200 150 1 100 mo gt t sec 0 15 30 45 3 1 Rated current Service factor 100 2 Motor OL factor 3 Motor OL time STARTUP Startup config BU protection The function protects braking resistor by monitoring current in the res
194. issioning devices that have been stored for long periods connect them to a power supply for two hours with no load connected in order to regenerate the capacitors the input voltage has to be applied without enabling the drive En cas de stockage des variateurs pendant plus de deux ans il est conseill de contr ler l tat des condensateurs CC avant d en effectuer le branchement Avant la mise en service des appareils ayant t stock s pendant longtemps il faut alimenter variateurs vide pendant deux heures pour r g n rer les condensateurs appliquer une tension d alimentation sans actionner le variateur Nore The terms Inverter Controller and Drive are sometimes used interchangably throughout the industry We will use the term Drive in this document Les mots Inverter Controller et Drive sont interchangeables dans le domaine industriel Nous utiliserons dans ce manuel seulement le mot Drive 12 Chapter O Safety Precautions ARTDriveL Instruction Manua Chapter 1 Functions and General Features 1 1 Drive The ARTDrive Lift is a field oriented vector drive with excellent speed control properties and a high torque dedicated to elevator industry and in general to hoisting applications It can be applied to both geared and gearless systems Available control modes according to the installed firmware are AVy AC AVy ACA AVy BR AVy BR4 Asynchronou
195. istor according to 12t characteristic When the protection becomes active it is possible to generate an alarm condition According to the different cases it is possible to use the device internal IGBT or external braking unit 1700 control N A RWZ 1 0 2 DP V F S B 0 Off Function disabled 1 Internal Enable Braking Unit internal device Default 2 External Enable Braking Unit external BUy device The parameter enables the Braking Unit function 1740 BU resistance ohm RWZ D Size Calc 10000 FK V F S B Braking Unit resistance value mounted optional on the power section terminals or external C amp BR1 1710 BU res cont pwr kW RWZ DSize 0 0 FK V F S B Braking Unit resistance continuous power 1720 res OL time sec RWZ D Size 1 1000 V F S B Resistance allowed overload time referring to the overload power The control of the external braking unit and of the resistance 121 protection is independent of BU type BU digital output command is available on the regulation card terminals 1730 BU res OL factor N A RWZ D Size 1 2 20 FK V F S B Allowed overload factor referring to the overload power of the braking resistance Overload factor overload Power rated Power Q i gt t sex 1 BU res cont power 2 BU res OL factor 3 BU res OL time 136 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode STARTUP Startup config Load def
196. jg jndjno xew 2 6 onb1oj Suryesg 1011501 JIM peurojur prepueis sureur A 00 103 TA oor Y A OEZ 10J PTA EZ DTA 028 paepuris pun LAOI Sunpeig o3ejpoAropu 288J0A104Q pepe pps per pes mz eT Torres To Tos Tos Tu LL 301991 IOWA TONO HORS XO popuouruiooo1 SI eUIOIX 4 osotp 104 Por ev eve oor at p s re per fer Sve roc Ic sl V 89c vic 881 tst OTI 96 c8 99 ec c STE SPT SLT Sel E6 9 rs 6 6c T 60 9 LET OIL t6 c9 LOE TST voc ST OL 62 29 Sv 6T eu oz cet T6 851 za 86 8 26 ZH 09 0 Ud 501 A 08 ST A OET TSSE OFT DAI A0 O ISsep OPT OAI 28 00 O ISSU 9p DAI 9eAQ c D 21042891 oseud c JNOJIM uorj ouuo ISSU 9pT DAT PADI OFT OAT A00 Tssep 9pT JAI WAOET D 1079891 aseyd uoroouuo OIAIOS snonurjuoo 10 juoxno jndug NT Kouonbojj jy oSej oA NIN G uou Jaysry 57 L O TI MS 107 685 Or MSy 107 L 0 4 221 D005 80 8 107 ty o1nje1oduro juorquie 107 tY 0 09 18 AM 1107987 Surje1oqq Kouonboag Suryoyrms 00918 OOTIL
197. l N A RWS 0 0 0X0000 DV F B Fixed programming at Index Storing Function according to following table 9557 IS ctrl src N A RWSZ 9551 List 39 F B IPA 9551 Int IS ctrl Default It allows to select the origin of the signal for Index storing function command For example a SBI word or DGFC word refer to signals List 39 of Pick List manual Nore Digital inputs 6 and 7 terminals 38 and 39 are dedicated to the use of the Index Qualifier home position switch when Index storing is enabled In the next table are showed the values of JS ctrl src from SBI word DGFC word or Int IS ctrl if IS ctrl sre Int IS ctrl ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 133 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode Access Description up e indicates the encoder index edge polarity 0 rising edge a b falling edge Not used It sets the qualifier input state to activate the encoder index reading 0 switched off when dig input 7 0 ENNQUAL 1 switched off when dig input 7 1 2 through signal 0 8 through signal 1 EE el Enc It points out for which encoder the values of this parameter are reported BE 0 operations requested on the Std Encoder input ES operations requested on the Exp Encoder input 1 once enables the reading of the first index signal edge only 2 continuous enables the reading of the index signal TAV13241 For the Index storing f
198. l and weights data have been entered 9439 Pre torque type N A WSZ 0 0 1 DV F S B 0 Ramp Initial torque will be removed in ramp 1 Costant Initial torque remains constant Pre torque type control 9434 Pre torque src N A RWSZ 9431 List2 F S B IPA 9431 Int Pre torque Default It allows to select an analog input to provide motor pre torque value refer to signals List 2 of Pick List manual 9435 Pre trq sign src N A RWSZ IPA 4000 List3 F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It connects the selected signal to the selector of the multiplier input if the signal is 0 multiply by 1 or if the signal is 1 multiply by 1 refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual TRAVEL Inertia comp Inertia compensation function can be used to compensate the inertia caused by the load of the motor during acceleration deceleration phase It avoids also speed overshoot at the end of ramp 2580 Inertia comp en N A RWS 1 0 1 DV F S B 0 OFF Inertia compensation function is switched off 1 Internal Inertia compensation function is using speed reference to calculate acceleration 2 External Inertia compensation function is using speed acceleration provided by external control through SBI card It enables inertia compensation function 2054 Int Inertia RWS 0 0 Calc PV F S B Internal value of the moment of Inertia Inertia value is automatically calculated after mechanical and weights data have been entered 2590 Inertia comp fi
199. lim src N A RWS 4000 Listi5 PIN V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to select the origin of the signal for torque current limit refer to signals List 15 of Pick List manual from software rel 3 300 REGULATION PARAM Torque config Torque curr lim Trq curr lim cfg 1190 Tourr lim sel N A RWS 0 0 4 DV V F S B 0 Off None Limits depend on drive rating 1 T lim Positive or negative limit Limits depend on IPA 1210 IPA1220 2 T lim mot gen Motor or Generator limit Limits depend on IPA 1210 IPA1220 3 T lim sym var Limits are controlled by IPA 1195 from software rel 3 300 4 T lim pos var Limits are controlled by 1195 from software rel 3 300 5 T lim neg var Limits are controlled by IPA 1195 from software rel 3 300 Selection of the torque Current limit type 1210 Tcurr lim A RWS Calc 0 00 Calc PV V F S B Positive current limit or Motor Positive power limit 154 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 1220 Tcurr lim A RWS Calc 0 00 Calc PV V F S B Negative current limit or Generator Negative power limit REGULATION PARAM Torque config Torque curr lim Trq curr lim mon 1250 Inuse Tcurr lim A R 0 00 000 0 00 PV V F S B Monitor of the positive current limit in use 1260 Inuse Tcurr lim A R 0 00 000 000 PV V F S B Monitor for the negative current limit in use 2445
200. lows the user to improve the gains profile of the observer circuit at low medium and high Motoring Regen speed REGULATION Sis SpdFbk gains Motoring gains 1090 SLS HPgain RWS 5 0 100 PP S Motor Proportional High gain 1091 818 mot Higain RWS 5 0 100 PP S Motor Integral High gain 1092 SLS mot MPgain RWS 5 0 100 PP Motor Proportional Medium gain 1093 5818 mot Mlgain 96 RWS 5 0 100 PP Motor Integral Medium gain 1094 818 mot LPgain RWS 1 0 100 PP Motor Proportional Low gain 156 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 1095 SLS mot Ligain RWS 0 0 100 PP Motor Integral Low gain REGULATION PARAM Sis SpdFbk gains Regen gains 1101 815 regen HPgain RWS 5 0 100 PP S Regen Proportional High gain 1102 SLS regen Higain RWS 5 0 100 PP Regen Integral High gain 1103 815 regen MPgain RWS 5 0 100 PP Regen Proportional Medium gain 1104 SLS regen Mlgain RWS 5 0 100 PP Regen Integral Medium gain 1105 SLS regen LPgain RWS 1 0 100 PP Regen Proportional Low gain 1106 SLS regen Ligain RWS 0 0 100 PP Regen Integral Low gain REGULATION PARAM SIs SpdFbk gains Gain transitions 1096 SLS tran level rpm RWS Calc 0 00 Calc PP Transition level from High to Medium profile 1097 SLS M L tran level rpm RWS Calc 0 00
201. lti Ramp sel src Active set 0 MRO 1 MR1 8078 ramp sel mon N A R 0 0 3 DP Displaying of the selected ramp set 7143 Door open src N A RWS 4000 List3 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual Source to Enable the function through the digital input 7138 Door open speed rpm RWS 0 00 0 00 V F S B Door open speed threshold Door open src Function enable signal Speed Door open speed Door open control function This function allows anticipated door open control before the car arrival at the floor level Door open signal can be given on digital output when speed drops below settable threshold The function must be enabled by the digital input Status of the speed checking command execution to open the door can be checked by providing the feedback from door open mechanism to drive digital input Alarm can be generated if command and feedback don t match ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 141 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 7118 Brake open src N A RWS 4001 List3 V F S B Source to enable brake release through the digital input In standard sequence brake release is controlled by the drive and therefore this parameter is set to ONE In case that brake release should be conditioned by some external control e g PLC set this parameter to digital input controlled by PLC Internal sequence for brake r
202. mable Programmable Yes Programm 33 13 Heatsink linear temperature sensor threshold was exceeded Regulat S OT Programmable Programmable Yes Programm 34 14 Regulation board linear temperature sensor threshold was exceeded Intake Air S OT Programmable Programmable Yes Programm 35 15 Cooling air intake linear temperature sensor threshold was exceeded only for models 18 5 KW and over Cont fbk fail Programmable No Yos No 36 16 It trips when the contact feedback signal is not detected Comm card fault Programmable No Yes Programm 37 17 Fault of optional LAN communication board Appl card fault Disable drive No No No 38 18 Fault of optional application coprocessor board Drv overload Programmable No No No 39 19 Drive overload accumulator exceeded trip threshold 208 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting ARTDrivel Instruction Manual o B o b t Bc gt me 2 8 t 5 E 5 5 S S oz RE a 3 2 5 5 8 3 9 5 lt as Be r4 Os lt Mot overload Programmable No No No 40 20 Motor overload accumulator exceeded trip threshold BU overload Programmable No No No 41 21 Braking resistor overload accumulator exceeded trip threshold Data lost Disable drive No No No 42 22 Data corrupted in non volatile memory Brake fbk fail Programmable No No No 43 23 It trips when the brake feedback signal is not detected Max time Disable drive No No No 44 24 Software task time overrun was detected
203. mber that the current limitation can control an overheating of the motor only due to overload not due to insufficient ventilation When the drive is operated at low speeds the additional use of PTC resistors or temperature dependent contacts in the motor windings is recommended unless separate forced ventilation is available Output chokes When using general purpose standard motors output chokes are recommended to protect winding isolation in some cases See section 4 8 2 Output chokes 16 Chapter 1 Functions and General Features ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 2 Inspection procedures Components Identification and Standard Specifications Note ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 2 1 Upon Delivery Inspection Procedures 2 1 1 General A high degree of care is taken in packing the ARTDriveL drives and preparing them for delivery They should only be transported with suitable transport equipment see weight data Observe the instructions printed on the packaging This also applies when the device is unpacked and installed in the control cabinet Upon delivery check the following e the packaging for any external damage e whether the delivery note matches your order Open the packaging with suitable tools Check whether any parts were damaged during transport the device type corresponds to your order In the event of any damage or of an incomplete or incorrect delivery please notify the responsible sales offices i
204. mercial units PDS mechanics process control etc The conditions of incorporation for the PDS CDM or BDM are specified at the time of the order consequently an exchange of technical data between supplier and client is possible The combination of the various items in the installation should be considered in order to ensure EMC Harmonic compensation is an evident example of this for both 1 in switch on 2 3 technical and economical reasons E g rolling mill paper machine crane etc 4 System Ready to use finished item which includes one or more PDSs or CDMs BDMs e g household equipment air conditioners standard machine tools standard pumping systems etc ARTDrivel Instruction Manual ee SIEI SpA SIEI Declaration of EC Conformity Document No ECC SR 02005 The product s Type reference AVy2040 5550 AC4 Manufacturer SIEI SpA Regolazione e Controllo 1 21040 Gerenzano VA Description Adjustable speed vector controlled ac drive s to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following standard s or normative document s Standard Document EN 60529 EN 50178 IEC 664 IEC 664 1 and complies with the provisions of the following EC Directive s 73 23 EEC modified by 93 68 EEC and named Low Voltage Directive CE marking from 2002 For Low Voltage Directive only Date of issue SIEI SpA 05 03 2002 General manager Engineering manager Thi
205. meter Spd 0 ref delay time for signal activation when motor has come to acomplete stop such that stopping shock is avoided In case of SLS and VF control since it is not possible to guarantee required torque at low frequencies it is better to refer to signal Ref is zero Threshold for signal activation can be set by parameter Spd 0 ref thr Brake opening time and closing time must also be considered When output contactor or brake are not controlled by the drive it is possible to set corresponding delay times to zero and implement required delay intervals in external control Contactor amp Brake drive control Standard command sequence diagram shows most complete sequence in which output contactor and brake are controlled by the drive Start of contactor control sequence in case that contactor is controlled by the drive depends on parameter Seq start mode In case that it is set as Start fwd rev contactor is closed when asserting the Start fwd or Start rev command Enable command is not required for closing contactors It is required only to start sequence of motor magnetization and therefore it can be provided for example using auxiliary contact of output contactor Drive will wait until Enable command is given In case that selection Enable is made contactors sequence starts when Enable command is asserted Start fwd rew commands are not required and one of them must be connected to 24V or more easily set corresponding source to ONE Since S
206. mmediately The devices should only be stored in dry rooms within the specified temperature ranges A certain degree of moisture condensation is permissible if this arises from changes in temperature see section 2 3 1 Permissible Environmental Conditions This does not however apply when the devices are in operation Always ensure that there is no moisture condensation in devices that are connected to the power supply 2 1 2 Inverter type designation The technical specification of the AVy Drive is stated in the type code Example AVy2040 XXX AC4 ARTDrive AC flux vector drive 3 phase input voltage Enclosure dimension identification Nominal motor output 4kW X KCS led module K programmable KBS keypad X without internal brake transistor B with internal brake transistor X standard software L LIFT software specific for lift control AC Firmware for asynchronous induction motors BR Firmware for synchronous brushless motors 4 Hardware Lift for internal external logic fan control and emergency module supplier control AVy2040 AVy5550 sizes only blank Hardware standard Chapter 2 Inspection procedures Components Identification and Std Specs 17 2 1 3 Nameplate Check that all the data stated in the nameplate enclosed to the inverter correspond to what has been ordered Figure 2 1 3 1 Identification nameplate Type AVy3150 KBL AC4 S N 02006233 Inp 230 480 Vac Fctry Set 400
207. ms RWS 200 65535 PP V F S B See Chapter 8 Lift Sequencies 7104 Cont open delay ms RWS 200 65535 PP V F S B Output contactors open delay See Chapter 8 Lift Sequencies 7105 Seq start mode N A RWS 0 2 DP V F S B 0 Start fwd rev 1 Enable 2 Mit spd out 0 from software rel 3 500 It changes the way how contactor sequence starts Start fwd rev selection allows to start contactor sequence without Enable command Enable is required only to run the motor Enable signal can be given by an auxilary contact of output contactors Enable selection allows to start contactor sequences only with Enable command spd out 0 selection allows to start contactor sequencies with multispeed selection Non zero multi speed value will cause sequence start Start command must be also asserted 7106 Seq start sel N A RWS 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Standard inp Using Start fwd rev src input 1 Alternative inp Using Start alt src input 7115 Start fwd src N A RWS 4021 List3 V F S B IPA 4021 DI 1 monitor Default refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual 7116 Start rev src N A RWS 4022 List3 PIN V F S B IPA 4022 DI 2 monitor Default refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual 7117 Start alt src N A RWS 4000 List3 PIN V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default 7072 Mitspds 0 src N A RWS 4024 List3 V F S B DI 4 monitor Default It allows to select the origin of the signals statin
208. nal Word 0 value configuration default connected to Drv SBI WO src 9021 Int Drv SBI W1 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Internal Word 1 value configuration default connected to Drv SBI W1 src 9022 Int Drv SBI W2 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Internal Word 2 value configuration default connected to Drv SBI W2 src 9023 Int Drv SBI W3 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Internal Word 3 value configuration default connected to Drv SBI W3 src 9024 Int Drv SBI W4 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Internal Word 4 value configuration default connected to Drv SBI W4 src 9025 Int Drv SBI W5 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Internal Word 5 va ue configuration default connected to Drv SBI W5 src 192 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Max COMMUNICATION Drv gt SBI word Drv gt SBI W mon Format Reg Mode 9030 SBI W0 mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Word 0 monitor of the PDC channel on the Drive output 9031 SBI W1 mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Word 1 monitor of the PDC channel on the Drive output 9032 Drv SBI W2 mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Word 2 monitor of the PDC channel on the Drive output 9033 SBI W3 mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Word 3 monitor of the PDC channel on the Drive output 9034 Drv SBI W4 mon N A R 0 00 PP V F S B Word 4 monitor of the PDC channel on the Drive output 9035 Drv SBI W5 mon N A R 0 00
209. nals List 1 of Pick List manual 9350 1 B10 src N A RWS 4000 Listi V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 10 signal selected to the Word 1 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 9351 Word1 B11 src N A RWS 4000 Listi V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 11 signal selected to the Word 1 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 9352 Word B12 src N A RWS 4000 List1 PIN V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 12 signal selected to the Word 1 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 9353 1 B13 src N A RWS 4000 List1 PIN V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 13 signal selected to the Word 1 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 178 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 9354 Word1i B14 src N A RWS 4000 Listi V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 14 signal selected to the Word 1 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 9355 1 B15 src N A RWS 4000 List1 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 15 signal selected to the Word 1 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 1 0 CONFIG Bits gt Word Bits gt Word1 mon 9356 W1 comp out N A R 0 0 DV V F S B Monitor for the hexadecim
210. ng motor rotor resistance Rr2 low lim Failure in calculating motor rotor resistance Drive disabled Enable permissive term 12 was found low when attempting to start autotune procedure Rr timeout Timeout occurred during measurement for the calculation of motor rotor resistance Rr2 timeout Timeout occurred during measurement for the calculation of motor rotor resistance LsS timeout Timeout occurred during measurement for the calculation of motor leakage inductance Drive enabled Drive was found to be already enabled when attempting to initiate autotune procedure Calc error An error occurred when processing measurement data Config error lt errcode gt The specified Configurator error occurred during database configuration based on autotune data Cmd not supported Command not supported in the current state ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 10 Troubleshooting 213 Chapter 11 EMC Directive Declaration of Conformity EMC Directive The possible Validity Fields of the EMC Directive 89 336 applied to PDS CE marking summarises the presumption of compliance with the Essential Requirements of the EMC Directive which is formulated in the EC Declaration of Conformity Clauses numbers refer to European Commission document Guide to the Application of Directive 89 336 EEC 1997 edition ISBN 92 828 0762 2 available to general public Clauses 3 7 6 2 1 6 2 3 1 amp 6 3 1 A PDS or CDM BDM
211. nly the following values 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 1931 Std dig enc mode N A RWZ 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 FP mode frequency and period measuring 1 F mode frequency measuring Measuring method of the digital encoder speed connected to the standard input 1927 Std enc supply N A RWZ 0 0 3 DP V F S B 0 5 41 8 16V 1 5 68 8 62 V 2 5 91 9 00 V 3 6 16 9 46 V Selection between 5V 8V range is done through dip switch 28 Power supply voltage of the standard Encoder input Increse this value in case of long encoder cable 1902 Std sin enc Vp V RW 0 5 0 1 5 FK Peak voltage value of the sinusoidal encoder connected to the standard input 1300 Std enc cnt dir N A RWSZ 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted Selection of standard encoder counting direction It allows to change sign of measured speed it is equivalent of swaping encoder channels AA lt gt BB 1926 Exp enc type N A RW 1 1 2 DK Encoder type connected to the expanded input 1 Digital digital encoder 2 Frequency input digital single channel frequency input channel A Signal 5V must be connected between A and power supply common Nore brushless motors expanded encoder cannot be used for speed feddback It can be used only for setting speed reference 132 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 1900 Exp enc pulses pp RWZ 1024 Cale Calc V F B Encoder pulses per revolution
212. nspection procedures Components Identification and Standard Specifications 17 2 1 Upon Delivery Inspection Procedures sene 17 VERENA C L 17 2 1 2 Inverter type designatiOn eiae irent et taies tete Prin re 17 2 1 3 Nameplate us Figure 2 1 3 1 Identification nameplate 18 Figure 2 1 3 2 Firmware amp Card revision level nameplate sss 18 Figure 2 1 3 3 Nameplates position acte ie a a nono 18 2 2 Component Identification 2 23 22 eter eie o adnan 19 Figure 2 2 1 Basic Setup of Frequency Inverter 19 2 3 Standard Specifications 20 2 3 1 Permissible Environmental Conditions 20 Disposal of the 21 2 3 2 AC Input Output Connection 21 2 3 3 AC Input 21 PS PRETIO SERE EE 21 Figure 2 3 4 1 Rating of Drive in Function of Switching Frequency e 22 Table 2 3 4 1 AC Input Output Specifications Table 2 3 4 2 A Overload Capability Sizes 1007 4370 Table 2 3 4 2 B Overload Capability Sizes 5450 81600 sss 25 2 90 ACCUFBGV tiic iiti orae 26 Table 2 3 6 1 Maximum Minimum Output Frequency 2 3 5 1 0 and Encoder Specifications Table 2 3 6
213. nstruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode Analog inputs Exp analog inps Analog input 2X An inp 2X mon 5087 An inp 2X output cnt R 0 00 32768 32767 PV V F S B Analog Input 2X output count displaying 5088 An inp 2X lt thr N A R 0 00 000 000 DV V F S B Display of threshold compensator state of Analog Input 2X 1 the condition is true 5081 Aninp 2X offset cnt RWS 0 16384 16383 PP V F S B Analog Input 2X offset count value displaying 5084 An inp 2X gain cnt RWS 0 16384 16383 PP V F S B Analog Input 2X gain count value displaying Analog inputs Exp analog inps Exp ana inp en 3900 Exp ana inp en N A RWS 0 0 1 DV V F S B 0 Disabled 2 Enabled It enables Expanded Analog Inputs Analog inputs Destinations This read only menu allows the user to see where the Analog inputs are connected If more then one source is connected to an Analog Input only one is shown If no sources are connected the message Not used is displayed 4500 Aninp1 dst It displays the Analog Input 1 destination 4501 Aninp2 dst It displays the Analog Input 2 destination 4502 Aninp3 dst It displays the Analog Input 3 destination 4503 An inp 1X dst It displays the Analog Input 1X destination 4504 An inp 2X dst It displays the Analog Input 2X destination 1 0 CONFIG Analog outputs CALIBRATION TO 10 V OUTPUT An out 1 mon in counts An out 1 scale
214. nt Indique un mode d utilisation de proc dure et de condition d exploitation essentiels ou importants 6 Chapter O Safety Precautions ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 0 Safety Precautions Warning According to the EEC standards the ARTDriveL and accessories must be used only after checking that the machine has been produced using those safety devices required by the 89 392 EEC set of rules as far as the machine industry is concerned These standards do not apply in the Americas but may need to be considered in equipment being shipped to Europe Drive systems cause mechanical motion It is the responsibility of the user to insure that any such motion does not result in an unsafe con dition Factory provided interlocks and operating limits should not be bypassed or modified Selon les normes EEC les drives ARTDRiveL et leurs accessoires doivent tre employ s seulement apr s avoir verifi que la machine ait t produit avec les m me dispositifs de s curit demand s par la r glementation 89 392 EEC concernant le secteur de l industrie Les syst mes provoquent des mouvements m caniques L utilisateur est responsable de la s curit concernant les mouvements m caniques Les dispositifs de s curit pr vues par l usine et les limitations operationelles ne doivent tre d pass s ou modifi s Electrical Shock and Burn Hazard When using instruments such as oscilloscopes to work on live equip m
215. occur by entering incompatible or invalid parameter data The drive reports configuration error by the following example description Calc error Calc error number Param Param error number The Calc error number denotes the cause of invalid calculation The Calc error number is composed as follows Calc error number Offset Error code The Offset denotes the type of error 0 for specific errors 100 for errors originated by the database calculation see DB error paragraph 500 for errors due to floating point calculation exception divide by zero etc 600 for errors originated by the configuration calculations range and so on The Error code denotes the origin cause of the error see values list below Error code values lists Error code values for Offset 0 no error signal not managed in current configurator state cannot stop regulation recipe export error recipe import error error while loading selftune data error while loading motor data reserved EC D 210 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Note See chapter 12 Parameter index 8 error while loading customer specific data 9 error while loading drive size data 10 error while writing file size ini 11 error while apply database The operation is refused because errors arised during group calculation To reset the errors it is necessary re enter the data and confirm correctness 12 error while saving too changes E
216. oder pulses ppr Digital encoders XE connector on Regulation card Type standard and inverted signal Max frequency 150 kHz select the appropriate number of pulses depending on required max speed Number of pulses per revolution __ min 512 max 9999 see table below Channels two channel differential A A B B C C An encoder loss detection is possible via firmware setting two channel A B Encoder loss detection is not possible Input Voltage 5V Power supply 5V 8V Internal supply Load capacity gt 4 5 mA 6 8 10 mA per channel Viakeypad STARTUP Startup config Encoder config it is possible to select 4 different values of internal encoder supply voltage to compensate the voltage reduction due to encoder cable length and load current encoder Selection available according to S28 jumper are 5 41V 5 68V 5 91V 6 18V and 8 16V 8 62V 9 00V 9 46V via Std enc supply parameter D ref Recommended min number of encoder pulses ppr Max number oreficader resolution rpm 0 003125 512 512 512 1024 1024 1024 0 125 256 512 512 1024 1024 1024 0 25 256 512 512 1024 1024 1024 150kHz 60 FSS 0 5 256 512 512 1024 1024 1024 1 256 512 512 1024 1024 1024 Mot pole pairs pm 50Hz 1 3000 2 1500 3 1000 4 750 5 600 6 500 Mot pole pairs pm 60Hz 1 8600 2 1800 3 1200 4 900 5 720 6 600 FSS Full scale speed
217. offset count value displaying 5064 An inp 1X gain cnt RWS 0 16384 16383 PP V F S B Analog Input 1X gain count value displaying Analog inputs Exp analog inps Analog input 2X An inp 2X src 5089 Al 2X sgn src N A RWS 4000 List3 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It connects the selected signal to the selector of the multiplier input if the signal is 0 multiply by 1 or if the signal is 1 multiply by 1 The multiplier allows to invert Analog Input 2X signal refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual Analog inputs Exp analog inps Analog input 2X An inp 2X cfg 5080 An inp 2X type N A RWS 0 0 2 DP V F S B 0 10V 10V 1 0 20mA 0 10V 2 4 20mA For An inp 2X type description refer to An inp 1 type description above 5082 An inp 2X thr cnt RWS 3277 16384 16383 PP V F S B Analog Input 2X threshold value in count 5083 An inp 2X scale N A RWS 1 16 16 PP V F S B Analog Input 2X scale factor 5085 An inp 2X lo lim cnt RWS 16384 32768 32767 PP V F S B Lower limit of the Analog Input 2X block output in count see figure of Analog Input 1 above 5086 An inp 2X hi lim cnt RWS 16383 32768 32767 PP V F S B Upper limit of the Analog Input 2X block output in count see figure of Analog Input 1 above Al 2X offs tune Refer to Al 1 offs tune description above Al 2X gain tune Refer to Al 1 offs gain description above 164 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel I
218. ollowing list 460 440 415 400 380 230V press to confirm If necessary it is also possible to change Ambient temperature and Switching frequency 86 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual b ad Set Motor data ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Ambient temp 40 Switching freq 8 Khz ele le Press the drive will show Busy Please wait then SETUP MODE Drive data Set Motor nameplate parameters in Motor data menu values accepted depend on drive size SETUP MODE Motor data Rated voltage 380 00 V to edit motor voltage To confirm the new value press Q to cancel edit press o 6 or scroll v to Rated frequency 50 00 Hz to edit motor frequency to confirm the new value press Rated current 43A le to edit motor current to confirm the new value press Nore The value should not be less than approx 0 3 times the drive rated current output current class 1 400V on the drive nameplate Rated speed 1460 00 rpm i Chapter 7 Commissioning 87 NV Autotune Nx to edit motor speed to confirm the new value press Note The value is intended to be the motor full load speed at the rated frequency If Slip value is available on the motor nameplate data set Rated speed parameter as following Rated speed Synchronous speed Slip Rated power 22 kW le to edit motor power to c
219. oltage Torque constant Rated current EMF constant Rated speed Stator resistance Pole pairs Ls S inductance Motor protection Thermistors PTC thermistors according to DIN 44081 or 44082 fitted in the motor can be connected directly to the frequency inverter via terminals 78 and 79 In this case the resistor 1 mounted between the terminals 78 and 79 has to be removed Temperature dependent contacts in the motor winding Temperature dependent contacts Klixon type can disconnect the drive via the external control or can be reported as an external fault on the frequency inverter terminal 15 They can also be connected to the terminals 78 and 79 in order to have a specific error signal In this case connect the existing 1 Kohm resistor in series to the wiring note that one side of it must be connected directly to terminal 79 The motor PTC interface circuit or klixon has to be considered and treated as a signal circuit The connections cables to the motor PTC must be made of twisted pairs with a shield the cable route should not be parallel to the motor cable or far away at least 20 cm Current limitation of the frequency inverter The current limitation can protect the motor from impermissible overloads For this the current limitation and the motor overload control function of the Drive Motor protection must be set so that the current is kept within the permissible range for the motor concerned Reme
220. omplete still 1 o Complete still 1 100 then eo Six Complete still 2 0 Complete still 2 100 after 1 80 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual End Autotune blinking Press 2 times to exit from the procedure SETUP MODE Autotune Switch off the output contactors and disconnect terminal 12 Enable Nore Autotune procedure can take up to different minutes to be completed If the operation generates any error messages for example when the drive is disabled during procedure execution Autotune err 1 Abort and red LED alarm blinking press o to exit 2 times then try to repeat the autotune procedure For more information about error messages and alarms please refer to section 10 Troubleshooting Press to Exit from SETUP MODE menu Wait few seconds message sequence will follow Busy Please wait then Restart Please wait then R S MONITOR then Load setup Yes gt Ent No gt Esc Press to load Autotune data Busy Please wait then Load setup Yes gt Ent No gt Esc ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 7 Commissioning 81 Press to exit from menu Startup config Load setup
221. on Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 143 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode Possible configuration Spd 0 enable Enable as start also parameters 32 are set Gains 1 are used for high speed running Gains 2 are used for middle accel decel speed Gains 3 are used for stopping Gains 0 are used for starting Gain 4 SGP tran 32 band SGP tran 21 band Speed ref increasing i gt lt gt Spd 0 gain Speed ref decreasing 1 1 i i Spd P2gain N Spd P3 gain Spd P1 gain Speed ref increasing gt Speed ref Spd 0 1 gain Speed ref decreasing Spd 12 gan NL Spd 13 gain Spd 11 gain 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D 1 1 1 4 1 T gt Speed ref i N SGP tran 32 thr S SGP tran 21 thr 3700 SpdP1 gain RWS 10 0 100 PP F S B Proportional speed 1 regulator gain at high speed 3701 Spdii gain RWS 10 0 100 PP F S B Integral speed 1 regulator gain at high speed 3702 SpdP2 gain RWS 10 0 100 PP F S B Proportional speed 2 regulator gain at medium speed 3703 Spdi2 gain RWS 10 0 100 PP F S B Integral speed 2 regulator gain at medium speed 3704 SpdP3 gain RWS 10 0 100 PP F S B Proportional speed 3 regulator gain at low speed 3705 Spdl3 gain RWS 10 0 100 PP F S B Integral speed 3 regulator
222. onfirm the new value press Nore For a motor nameplate rated in HP set Rated power kW 0 736 x motor Hp rating Cosfi 0 85 to edit motor cos power factor to confirm the new value press Q Nore Leave default value for Cos q if the data is not available from the nameplate Efficiency 91 20 is to edit motor efficiency to confirm the new value press Nore Leave default value for efficiency if the data is not available from the nameplate Press o to exit from Motor data for some seconds the drive will show Busy Please wait then SETUP MODE Motor data Nore If any changes have been made to Motor data menu parameters with this operation internal drive values will be calculated and autotune results will be initialized Ifthe operation generates any error messages or alarm led comes 88 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual on please check consistency of motor parameters and try again or refer to section 10 Troubleshooting Scroll to perform Autotune procedure two options can be used for this procedure Complete still or Complete rot Nore When motor is coupled to gearbox and lift is installed use Complete still motor still When motor is uncoupled or gearbox does not represent more than 5 of load and lift car is not installed use Complete rot motor on rotation Warning Option Complete still may also cause limited shaft r
223. oning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Encoder type configuration Encoder config Nx Press o 2 times Startup config Encoders config Speed fbk sel Std encoder Std enc type Sinusoidal Hall Press to select the parameter see following list according to the encoder type press to confirm Parameter Description SinusoidalHall is a sinusoidal incremental encoder with A A B B C C SinusoidalSinCos SinusoidalExtern DigitalHall DigitalExtern SinCos Resolver SinusoidalHiperface Sinusoidal Intern Digital Intern ARTDrivel Instruction Manual traces and three digital Hall sensor absolute position traces for initial synchronization XE connector is a sinusoidal incremental encoderwith A A B B C C traces and two analog Sin Cos absolute position traces for initial synchronization XE connector is a sinusoidal incremental encoder with A A B B traces and absolute position information through SSI serial interface for initial synchronization XE connector requires APC100y card is a digital incremental encoder with A A B B C C traces and three digital Hall sensor absolute position traces for initial synchronization XE connector is a digital incremental encoder with A A B B traces and absolute position information through SSI serial interface for initial synchronization XE connector requires APC100y card is a sinusoidal absolute encoder wi
224. ons ARTDrivel Instruction Manua Because the ambient temperature greatly affects Drive life and reli ability do not install the Drive in any location that exceeds the allow able temperature Leave the ventilation cover attached for tempera tures of 104 F 40 C or below Etant donn que la temp rature ambiante influe sur la vie et la fiabilit du drive on ne devrait pas installer le drive dans des places ou la tem perature permise est d pass e Laisser le capot de ventilation en place pour temp ratures de 104 F 40 C ou inf rieures If the Drive s Fault Alarm is activated consult the TROUBLESHOOT ING section of this instruction book and after correcting the problem resume operation Do not reset the alarm automatically by external sequence etc Sila FaultAlarm du drive est activ e consulter la section du manuel concernant les d fauts et apr s avoir corrig l erreur reprendre l op ration Ne pas r iniliatiser l alarme automatiquement par une s quence externe etc Be sure to remove the desicant dryer packet s when unpacking the Drive If not removed these packets may become lodged in the fan or air passages and cause the Drive to overheat Lors du d ballage du drive retirer le sachet d shydrat Si celui ci n est pas retir il emp che la ventilation et provoque une surchauffe du drive Caution The Drive must be mounted on a wall that is constructed of heat re sistant material While the Drive
225. or Default By using the Fault reset src source it is possible to select the origin of the reset command signal for example a command via the terminal strip through a digital Input refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual ALARM CONFIG Undervoltage It trips when the voltage on the drive DC link is lower than the minimum threshold according to the Mains voltage setting 9050 UV restart N A RWS 1 0 1 DP V F S B 0 off 1 on Undervoltage restart 9051 UV restart time ms RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V F S B Undervoltage restart time 396 UV select src N A RWSZ 4001 List3 V F S B Source to disable Undervoltage alarm through digital input To be used exclusivelly with Emergency Module Supply Main power supply must be off 182 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode ALARM CONFIG Overvoltage It trips when the voltage on the drive DC link is higher than the maximum threshold according to the Mains voltage setting 9052 OV restart N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 off 1 on Overvoltage restart 9053 OV restart time ms RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V F S B Overvoltage restart time ALARM CONFIG IGBT desaturat It trips when the IGBT instantaneous overcurrent is detected by gate desaturation sensing circuit 9046 DS restart N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 off 1 on IGBT desaturation restart 9047 DS restart time ms R
226. otation Warning Option Complete rot causes motor shaft rotation close to rated speed It is preferred one for the higher accuracy but it requires free uncoupled rotation of the motor shaft SETUP MODE Autotune Select the desired option scroll or Complete still Start Complete rot Start As standard example with motor and machine installed on system Complete still are used Connect terminal 12 Enable to terminal 19 24VDC through relays or local switch switch on the output contactors and leave the brake closed Complete still Start Complete still Press Key press to start Nore Autotune can be aborted at any time by pressing WY ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 7 Commissioning 89 The Autotune procedure will start through which the drive will display from Complete still 1 0 Complete still 1 100 then 1 Complete still 2 0 Complete still 2 100 after ct 1 Autotune blinking Press o 2 times to exit from the procedure SETUP MODE Autotune Switch off the output contactors and disconnect terminal 12 Enable Nore Autotune procedure can take up to different minutes to be completed If the operation generates any error messages for example when the drive is disabled during procedure execution Autotune err 1 Abort and red LED alarm blinking press o to exit 2 times then try to repeat the autotune procedure For mor
227. parameter to rated motor speed press to confirm Press to exit from Mechanical data menu Scroll o to Weights menu Startup config Weights Pulley diameter I4 3 Gearbox ratio Rope weight Gearbox Pulley Car weight L em Load weight Counter weight Press to set Car weight weight of the lift car Counter weight Load weight Rope weight Motor and Gearbox inertia parameter Chapter 7 Commissioning 105 VY Car weight 0 Kg Press and edit the value of Car weight press to confirm Counter weight g Press Qo and the value of Counter weight car weight to achive balance System parameter press to confirm Load weight 0 Kg de Press do and edit the value of Load weight maximum weight of lift load parameter press to confirm Rope weight g Press and edit the value of Rope weight total inertia of cabin rope parameter press iue to confirm Motor inertia 0 00 Kg m P Press and edit the value of Motor inertia if it is not available leave to default press to confirm Gearbox inertia 0 00 Kg m de Press and edit the value of Gearbox inertia if it is not available leave to default press to confirm Nore Gearbox inertia is intended as inertia of all rotating masses on slow rotating side of gearbox e g pulley inertia etc Press o to exit from Weight menu 106 Chapter 7 Commissi
228. pared of the Compare 1 block refer to signals List 5 of Pick List manual 6050 1 inp 1 src N A RWS IPA6042 List5 PIN V F S B IPA 6042 Cmp 1 inp 1 Default It allows to select the origin of the input signal 1 to be compared of the Compare 1 block refer to signals List 5 of Pick List manual 6051 1 inp 2 src N A RWS IPA6043 List5 V F S B IPA 6043 Cmp 1 inp 2 Default It allows to select the origin of the input signal 2 to be compared of the Compare 1 block refer to signals List 5 of Pick List manual CUSTOM FUNCTIONS Compare Compare 1 Compare 1 cfg 6041 Cmp1 inp 0 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Value of the internal input signal 0 default connected to Cmp 1 inp 0 src ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 199 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 6042 CmptinptT NA RWS O00 PW VFSB Value of the internal input signal 1 default connected to Cmp 1 inp 1 src 6043 Cmp1 inp2 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Value of the internal input signal 2 default connected to Cmp 1 inp 2 src 6044 1 function N A RWS 0 0 10 DP V F S B 0 None 1 10 2 10 1 3 10 lt 1 4 10 gt 5 10 lt I1 lt 12 6 10 7 101 H 8 101 lt Hn 9 0 gt H 10 0 lt 1 lt 12 11 10 AND 11 AND 12 12 10 OR 11 AND 12 13 10 1 6045 1 window cnt RWS 0 00 0 00 PP V F S B It allows to set a window stating an accep
229. peed Press o to exit from Mechanical data menu Busy Please wait then Startup config Mechanical data Pulley diameter e a Weight Gearbox ratio Rope weight Motor Gearbox Car weight es Load weight Counter weight Scroll v to Weights menu Startup config Weights Press to set Car weight weight of the lift car Counter weight Load weight Rope weight Motor and Gearbox inertia parameter Car weight 0 Kg Press ie and edit the value of Car weight press to confirm Counter weight 0 Kg Press ner and the value of Counter weight car weight to achive balance 92 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Braking unit setting BU protection NY ARTDrivel Instruction Manual system parameter press to confirm Load weight 0 Kg de Press and edit the value of Load weight maximum lift load weight parameter press to confirm Rope weight 0 Kg de Press and edit the value of Rope weight total inertia of cabin rope parameter press to confirm Motor inertia 0 00 Kg m P Press and edit the value of Motor inertia if not available leave to default press to confirm Gearbox inertia 0 00 Kg m de Press and edit the value of Gearbox inertia if not available leave to default press to confirm Nore Gearbox inertia is intended as inertia of all rotating ma
230. ponding bit is set with 1 Its setting remains equal to 1 till the alarm becomes inactive and the State Machine or Sequencer is not in an alarm condition see the previous paragraphs If the state of a single alarm has to be controlled via an output then only the mask needed bit has to be set with 1 If the state of several alarms has to be controlled via an output then the mask corresponding bits have to be set with 1 The alarms have to be controlled by the Word itself Ex the state of the External fault alarm has to be read Mask W1 1 0x0100 gt 0000 0001 0000 0000 Mask W2 51 0x0000 gt 0000 0000 0000 0000 Mask W3 51 0x0000 gt 0000 0000 0000 0000 DO 0 src Select ipa Alm W1 S1 The state of the Undervoltage and Overvoltage alarm has to be read Mask W1 1 0x0100 gt 0000 0000 0000 0110 Mask W2 1 0x0000 gt 0000 0000 0000 0000 Mask W3 51 0x0000 gt 0000 0000 0000 0000 DO 0 src Select ipa Alm W1 51 The state of the External fault and F_R_C alarm has to be read Mask W1 51 0x0100 gt 0000 0001 0000 0000 Mask W2 51 0x0000 gt 0000 0000 1000 0000 DO 0 src Select ipa Alm W1 S1 DO 1 src Select ipa Alm W2 S1 Alarm status Alm status cfg 9610 Mask W1 S1 N A RWS OXFFF 0 1 DP V F S B 9611 Mask W2 S1 N A RWS OXFFF 0 1 DP V F S B 9612 Mask W3 S1 N A RWS OXFFF 0 1 DP 9614 Mask W1 S2 N A RWS 0 1 DP V F S B 9615 Mask 2 S2 N A R
231. pulses ppr Encoder power supply test if the internal supply 5V is used During the start up of the drive verify the encoder power supply to the encoders terminals with all the encoders channels connected via Std enc supply parameter set the appropriate voltage if the encoder supply characteristic example 5V 5 is out of range Terminals for external encoder connections Male terminals type 15 poles high density VGA type Connector cover Standard 9 poles low profile Example manufacturer code AMP 0 748676 1 3M 3357 6509 XE XS 00000 O 48 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure ARTDrivel Instruction Manual The connection with the drive is through a 15 poles high density sub D connector VGA type Please note that it is mandatory to use a shielded cable with al least 80 coverage The shield should be connected to ground on both sides Nore For synchronous brushless firmware it is possible to use only encoder having pulses per revolution equal to number that is power of 2 Example 512 ppr 1024 ppr 2048 ppr etc Table 4 5 4 Assignment of the High Density XE Connector for a Sinusoidal or a Digital Encoder Designation Function 10 Max voltage Max current Channel B 5 V digital or 10 mA digital or PIN1 ENC B Incremental encoder signal B negative 1 V pp analog 8 3 mA analog PIN2 8V Encoder supply voltage see table 4 5 3 200 mA Channel C 5 V digital
232. r with A A B B C C traces and two analog Sin Cos absolute position traces for initial synchronization SExtern sinusoidal incremental encoder with A A B B C C traces and absolute position information thought SSI serial interface for initial synchronization requires APC100y card DEHS digital incremental encoder with A A B B C C traces and three digital Hall sensor absolute position traces factory setting DExtern digital incremental encoder with A A B B C C traces and absolute position information thought SSI serial interface for initial synchronization requires APC100y card 8 sinusoidal encoder with two analog SinCos absolute position traces RES resolver requires EXP RES card SEHiperface sinusoidal incremental encoder with A A B B traces and Hiperface interface SE Intern sinusoidal incremental encoder with A A B B C C traces absolute position traces are not necessary because phasing is performed automatically at every start DE Intern digital incremental encoder with A A B B C C traces absolute position traces are not necessary because phasing is performed automatically at every start Encoders are used to feed back a speed signal to the drive The encoder should be coupled to the motor shaft with a backlash free connection Optimal regulation results are ensured when using sinusoidal encoders Digital encoders may also be used but regulation properties get wors
233. rc p 194 Drv DGFC S W3mon p 195 Drv DGFC S W3src p 194 Drv DGFC S W4mon p 195 Drv DGFC S W4src p 194 Drv OL accum p 123 Drv SBI WO mon p 193 Drv SBI WO src p 192 Drv SBI W1 mon p 193 Drv SBI W1 src p 192 Drv SBI W2 mon p 193 Drv SBI W2 src p 192 Drv SBI W3 mon p 193 Drv SBI W3 src p 192 Drv SBI W4 mon p 193 Drv SBI W4 src p 192 Drv SBI W5 mon p 193 Drv SBI W5 src p 192 Drv gt SBI W cfg p 192 Drv gt SBI W mon p 193 Drv gt SBI W src p 192 222 Chapter 12 Parameters Index Drv gt SBl word p 192 DS restart p 183 DS restart time p 183 Dyn vit margin p 156 E EF activity p 183 EF hold off p 184 EF restart p 184 EF restart time p 184 EF src p 183 Efficiency p 127 EMF constant p 127 En Disable mode p 159 Enable cmd mon p 160 Enable SM mon p 122 Encoders config p 131 Enter setup mode p 126 Exp ana inp en p 165 Exp ana out en p 168 Exp dig inp cfg p 170 Exp dig inp en p 172 Exp dig inp mon p 171 Exp dig out cfg p 175 Exp dig out en p 176 Exp dig out mon p 175 Exp dig out src p 174 Exp enc cnt dir p 133 Exp enc position p 123 Exp enc pulses p 133 Exp enc type p 132 External fault p 183 F FastStop cmd mon p 160 FastStop SM mon p 122 FastStop src p 159 Fault rese p 182 Fault reset src p 182 Flux p 123 ux config p 155 ux level src p 155 ux max lim cfg p 156 ux max lim mon p 156 ux max lim src p 155 ux ref p 123 ux regulator p 153 uxReg rot p 128 uxReg still p 128
234. re available Complete still can be used when motor is coupled to gearbox brake is applied and lift car is installed It could cause limited shaft rotation when brake is not applied Complete rot can be used when motor is uncoupled or gearbox does not represent more than 5 load and lift car is not installed It causes motor shaft rotation close to the rated speed Set all system System mechanical data mechanical data Gearbox ratio Pulley dameter Full scale speed Set all system System weights data weight data Cabin weight Counter weight Load weight Rope weight Motor inertia Gearbox inertia Set braking unit Braking Unit parameters Braking unit type internal parameters external Braking unit resistance Braking unit power Set speed profile A binary combination of three digital input allows to select up to 8 different speed setpoints Set ramp profile Accelerations jerk and decelerations jerk can be set in the ramp profile 74 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manua Nore Drive Startup procedure below take as example an AVy4220 KBL AC4 drive software revision 3 500 7 1 1 Field Oriented mode Field oriented mode set up Cunnnnnnenmnnnmnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnes ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Power up the drive This operation will take about 10 seconds and the drive will display LEDs blink for test AC Drive Lift Startup af
235. rent of the Drive depends on the operating state and the service conditions of the connected motor and the use of input reactors The table 2 3 4 1 shows the values corresponding to rated continuous service IEC 146 class 1 keeping into account typical output power factor for each size 2 3 4 AC Output The output of the AVy Drive is ground fault and phase to phase short protected The switching frequency is constant in the speed range and depends on the drive size The connection of an external voltage to the output terminals of the Drive is not permitted Nore It is allowed to disconnect the motor from the Drive output by means of output contactor only after the Drive has been disabled ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 2 Inspection procedures Components Identification and Std Specs 21 The value for the continuous output current rating 1 depends on AC Input voltage K Ambient temperature K and Switching frequency K values of derating factor are the listed on table 2 3 4 1 Lonr Ly x The applicable deratings are automatically set when selecting the appropriate values of AC Input voltage Ambient temperature and Switching frequency Figure 2 3 4 1 Rating of Drive in Function of Switching Frequency Rated drive current 400V _ Over rating only on 2 2 4 5 5 18 5kW 110 105 100 85 gt 70 Switching frequency 45 160kW kHz 0 75
236. rent speed point Multi speed 0 Multi speed 7 R S STARTUP R S TRAVEL TRAVEL Speed profile Smooth start spd 0 rpm Multi speed 0 0 rpm Press to set Multi speed 0 set point Multi speed 0 00000000 rpm Edit the value requested by the system and press to confirm Scroll o to set Multi speed 1 set point Multi speed 1 0 rpm Press and repeat the procedure as for Multi speed 0 Scroll v to set all the others Multi speed required by the system ATTENTION Through the combination of Mlt spd s0 src equal Digital input 4 Mit spd s1 src equal Digital input 5 and Mit spd s2 src equal Digital input 6 is possible to select Multi speed desired according to next table Chapter 7 Commissioning 95 Mil spd sel Mtl spd sel Mtl spd sel ACTIVE SPEED 2 He 1 src 0 src o 0 Multi speed 0 meo EK E REN 8 Multi speed 1 L0 Multi speed 2 L0 Muti speed 3 0 Mukispeed4 L1 0o r7 Meisped5 L1 1 0 Miisped TAV3i011 Press to exit from Speed profile menu V7 AVyL drive allows to set a Ramp profile as the picture shows below Ramp setting Ramp profile Multispeed Speed ref MRO acceleration MRO acc ini jerk lt MRO acc end jerk Acceleration Speed ref Multispeed Multispeed Acceleration MRO dec end lieg MRO dec ini jerk gt uno deceleration x TR
237. resistors whose technical data are reported in the table 5 8 2 1 have been dimensioned to tolerate an overload equal to 4 time their nominal power for 10 seconds In any event they can tolerate also an overload whose energy dissipation is the same of the maximum power level defined by 2 Ne VI iy Mey ohm Where V r braking unit threshold see table 4 9 2 2 With reference to the figure 4 9 2 4 where the power profile is the typical triangular one the following example can be taken into consideration see also table 4 9 2 1 60 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Resistor model MRI T600 100R Nominal power Pr 600 W Maximum energy E 4 x 600 W x 10 s 24000 J Inverter mains supply 460V Voltage threshold V pr 780V 2 24000 AL W Te 2 2 7 8 5 Rer 100 6084 It is necessary to consider the following relation A If Typ S PA verify 1 Pus 2 EQ T Where is the average power of the cycle see fig 4 9 2 4 Ps Tar 2 lt P oT NBR The average power of the cycle must not be higher than the nominal power of the resistor B If T gt E Pyer that is to say in case of very long braking time it must be dimensioned Pu SR Figure 4 9 2 4 Generic Braking Cycle with Triangular Profile n P Poor t Te If one of the above mentioned rules is not respected it is necessary to increase the t
238. riable Example 01 02 36 01 02 00 Undervoltage 01 02 36 time of alarm 02 02 00 date of alarm Undervoltage alarm description MONITOR Alarm log clear It deletes all the alarms listed in the Alarm log ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 125 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode STARTUP Startup config Enter setup mode Enter setup mode command allows the access to SETUP MODE to set drive basic parameters and motor plate data Drive will reboot and few seconds are required All changes and operations done in the SETUP MODE will be automatically saved every time the user executes exits setup mode SETUP MODE Drive data 380 Mains voltage V RW 2 0 5 DK V F S B Drive power supply voltage Select supply voltage parameter accurately according to actual drive supply voltage After changing this parameter selftune data are initialized to default self tuning must be repeated 0 230 V 1 380 V 2 400 V 3 415V 4 5 440 V 460 V 1350 Ambient temp C RW 0 0 1 DK V F S B Drive ambient temperature Selecting 50 C will result in drive derating see chapter 2 3 After changing this parameter selftune data are initialized to default self tuning must be repeated 0 40 C 1 50 C 170 Switching freq kHz RW D Size 0 3 DK V F S B Drive PWM switching frequency Selecting higher switching frequency then default results in drive derating see table 2 3 4 1 Selec
239. rofile Two options are available Encoder phasing motor rotating or still 0060000 0000 0 00 Save all the parameters ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 7 Commissioning 99 Set drive parameters Drive data VY Nore Drive Startup procedure below take as example an AVyL 4220 BR4 drive software revision 3 300 Power up the drive after few seconds the drive will display the main menu R S MONITOR R 0 S 0 STARTUP Nore Upon opening the STARTUP menu the drive enters in the parametrization mode STARTUP Startup config Startup config Enter setup mode lt T lt un 5 a Uu SETUP MODE Drive data SETUP MODE Drive data Mains voltage 400 V Press or to select AC input voltage from the following list 460 440 415 400 380 230V press to confirm If necessary it is also possible to change Ambient temperature Switching frequency and Speed resolution Ambient temp 40 Switching freq 8 Khz ele le 100 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Spd ref fbk res 0 250 rpm Press or to select a speed resolution value based on max motor speed E g if rated speed is 144 rpm set 0 03125 rpm see table Speed resolution Max speed value Spd ref fbk res 0 125 rpm 2048 rpm 0 25 rpm 4096 rpm 0 5 rpm 8192 rpm 1 rpm 16384rpm 0 03125 rpm 512 rpm
240. rrent to confirm the new value press Nore value should not be less than approx 0 3 times the drive rated current output current class 1 400V on the drive nameplate Rated speed 1460 00 rpm i to edit motor speed to confirm the new value press Nore value is intended to be the motor full load speed at the rated frequency If Slip is available on the motor nameplate set Rated speed parameter as following Rated speed Synchronous speed Slip Rated power 22 kW i to edit motor power to confirm the new value press Nore For motor nameplate rated in HP set Rated power kW 0 736 x motor Hp rating 78 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual lo Autotune CCLLELELLELLELEEEE ARTDrivel Instruction Manual 0 85 Cosfi Qo to edit motor cos 6 power factor to confirm the new value press Nore Leave default value for Cos if the data is not available from the nameplate Efficiency 91 20 is to edit motor efficiency to confirm the new value press Nore Leave default value for efficiency if the data is not available from the nameplate Press to exit from Motor data for some seconds the drive will show Bus Please wait then SETUP MODE Motor data Nore If any changes have been made to Motor data menu parameters with this operation internal drive values will be calculated and autotune results w
241. rror code values for Offset 100 See DB errors section 10 2 3 Error code values for Offset 500 500 error code 3 Integer overflow 4 Floating overflow 5 Floating underflow 7 Divide by zero 9 Undefined float 10 Conversion error 11 Floating point stack underflow 12 Floating point stack overflow Error code values for Offset 600 600 error code no error switching freq error mains voltage error ambient temperature error regulation mode error take selection error base speed error drive size error IQ A BB O D For example Calc error number 606 is a configuration error 600 caused by speed base value 6 out of range The Param error number is not meaningful 10 2 2 Database Errors DB Errors DB errors are caused by a incorrect setting in a single parameter This problem is originated in the database calculation For example the most common are DB error Limit HIGH DBerror Limit LOW The message DB error is displayed by the drive in this format DB ERR IPA error code The IPA denotes the parameter number which caused the DB error calculation The error code denotes the type error Example of message DB error displayed DB ERR 3420 5 This means that the DB error is caused by IPA 3420 V f voltage which is below the low limit Error code 5 denotes the type error for the DB error code values list see below To find the low limit which depends on drive configuration it is possible to go to the V
242. rt mon Default It allows to select the signal to generate the a digital Start 1 command and a digital Stop 0 command refer to signals List 17 of Pick List manual 154 FastStop src N A RWS 4000 List 18 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to select the signal to generate the FastStop command refer to signals List 18 of Pick List manual 1 0 CONFIG Commands Commands cfg Commands select parameter determines the logic for the Start Stop Edge sensitive signal or Level sensitive signal or O keys keypad commands control 4002 Commands select N A RWS 2 0 4 DV V F S B 0 Terminals Level drive is controlled via terminal strip using a Level sensitive signals 1 Terminals Edge The drive is controlled via terminal strip using a Edge sensitive signals 2 Digital Level The drive is controlled from a communication or application card using a Level sensitive signals 3 Digital Edge The drive is controlled from a communication or application card using a Edge sensitive signals 4 1 0 keys The drive is controlled from the keyboard using the O keys terminal 12 to and terminal 13 to 24Vdc are required Setting of this parameter is not allowed while terminal enable is active 4004 En Disable mode N A RWS 0 0 3 DP V F S B 0 Off 1 Stop FS amp Spd 0 2 Stop amp Spd 0 3 FS amp Spd 0 It controls the action time of the stop condition Setting of this parameter is not allowed while terminal enable is active
243. s 2 by pressing on both sides as shown on the above figure 3 unscrew the two screws 4 to remove the cable entry plate The top cover must be removed in order to mount option cards and change the internal jumper settings remove the keypad and disconnect the connector 5 ift the top cover on the bottom side over the connector level and then push it to the top 6 Sizes 3110 to 3150 The terminal cover and cable entry plate of the device must be removed in order to fit the electrical connections unscrew the two screws 1 and remove the cover of devices unscrew the two screws 4 to remove the cable entry plate The top cover must be removed in order to mount the option card and change the internal jumper settings remove the keypad and disconnect the connector 5 lift the top cover on the bottom side over the connector level and then push it to the top 6 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 35 Figure 4 1 2 Removing the Covers Sizes 4185 to 81600 Sizes 4185 to 81600 The terminal cover of the device must be removed in order to fit the electrical connections unscrew the two screw 2 and remove the cover 1 The top cover must be removed in order to mount the option card and change the internal jumper settings unscrew the two screw 3 and remove the top cover by moving it as indicated on figure 4 In order to avoid damage to the drive it is not allowed to transport
244. s declaration confirms compliance with the named directives but is not a guarantee of any performances The safety related recommendations of the delivered product documentation have to be observed AVy ACA WO1 dec ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 11 EMC Directive Declaration of Conformity 215 GERAN SIEI SpA SIEI Declaration of EC Conformity Document No ECC SR 02006 The product s Type reference AVy2040 5550 BR4 Manufacturer SIEI SpA Regolazione e Controllo 21040 Gerenzano VA Description Adjustable speed vector controlled ac drive s to which this declaration relates is in conformity with the following standard s or normative document s Standard Document EN 60529 EN 50178 IEC 664 IEC 664 1 and complies with the provisions of the following EC Directive s 73 23 EEC modified by 93 68 EEC and named Low Voltage Directive CE marking from 2002 For Low Voltage Directive only Date of issue SIEI SpA General manager Engineering manager This declaration confirms compliance with the named directives but is not a guarantee of any performances The safety related recommendations of the delivered product documentation have to be observed AVy BR4 W01_dec 216 Chapter 11 EMC Directive Declaration of Conformity ARTDriveL Instruction Manua Chapter 12 Parameters Index IPAs 100 p 137 1250 p 155 2005 p 153 2137 p 180 3240 p 124
245. s definition of resistor power in continous service BU res cont pwr Nore Refer to chapter 9 2 for details on BU protection BU res cont pwr 4 00 kw Press to edit the power value press to confirm 108 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Save configuration Speed setting Speed profile VY ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Press to exit from Encoder Config menu Press to exit from Startup Config menu STARTUP Save config The prompt displays Save config Recommended For this operation the drive will take around 5 seconds Press to execute the procedure Busy Please wait to STARTUP Save config Press o to exit from STARTUP menu R 0 S 0 STARTUP AVyL drive allows to set a Speed profile through 8 different speed point Multi speed 0 Multi speed 7 R S STARTUP TRAVEL TRAVEL Speed profile Smooth start spd 0 rpm Multi speed 0 0 rpm Press to set Multi speed 0 set point Multi speed 0 00000000 rpm Edit the value requested by the system and press to confirm Scroll to set Multi speed 1 set point Chapter 7 Commissioning 109 VW Ramp setting Ramp profile Nx Multi speed 1 0 rpm Press and repeat the procedure as for Multi speed 0 Scroll o to set all the others Multi speed required by the system ATTEN
246. s motor firmware Synchronous motor firmware Control Field oriented vector control Brushless control Modes Sensorless vector control V f advanced control ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Dedicated features e Lift sequence Typical sequence of input output signals used in elevator application brake output contactor amp door control e Parameters in linear units Itis possible to select different engineering units for principal parameters determining the movement rpm for speed and rpm s rmp s for acceleration referred to motor or mm s for speed mm s mm s for acceleration referred to car e Lift mechanical parameters Parameters of mechanical system like Pulley diameter and Gearbox ratio for transformation between unit systems and System weights to calculate inertia and tune speed regulator for desired response e Ramp generation Two independent S ramps selectable through digital input with 4 independent jerk settings Dedicated deceleration ramp corresponding to stop command e Multi speed 8 preset speed reference values At start possibility to overwrite with additional value to achieve smooth start e Pre torque Initialisation of speed regulator from weight sensor to avoid saging or lifting at start e Landing control Precision control of car position in floor zone through internal position regulator e Higher overload Overload capability corresponding to typical load cycle used in elevator appl
247. s p 129 Word gt Bits p 179 WordO BO src p 176 Word0 src p 176 Word0 B10 src p 177 Word0 B11 src p 177 Word0 B12 src p 177 Word0 B13 src p 177 Word0 B14 src p 177 Word0 B15 src p 177 Word0 B2 src p 176 Word0 src p 176 Word0 B4 src p 176 Word0 B5 src p 176 WordO B6 src p 176 Word0 B7 src p 177 Word0 B8 src p 177 Word0 B9 src p 177 Word0 gt Bits cfg p 179 Word0 gt Bits mon p 179 Word0 gt Bits src p 179 Word1 BO src p 177 Word1 B1 src p 177 Word1 B10 src p 178 Word1 B11 src p 178 Word1 B12 src p 178 Word1 B13 src p 178 Word1 B14 src p 179 Word1 B15 src p 179 Word1 B2 src p 178 Word1 src p 178 Word1 B4 src p 178 Word1 B5 src p 178 Word1 B6 src p 178 Word1 B7 src p 178 Word1 B8 src p 178 Word1 B9 src p 178 Word1 Bits cfg p 180 Word1 Bits mon p 180 Word1 Bits src p 180 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual SIEI Via Carducci 24 21040 Gerenzano VA Italia Tel 39 02 967 601 Fax 39 02 968 26 53 Information E mail info siei it Technical Assistance E mail technohelp siei it Internet WWW sieigroup com SIEI worldwide Germany SIEI AREG Gemmrigheim Tel 49 7143 9730 E mail info sieiareg de France SIEI FRANCE Saverne Te 33 3 88 02 14 14 E mail sieispa fr wanadoo fr England SIEI UK Telford Tel 44 1952 604555 E mail sales sieiuk co uk Slovenia SIEI EST Ljubljana Tel 386 611 614 940 E mail ljubljana sieiest com
248. splays the Digital Input 1 destination 4507 DI2dst It displays the Digital Input 2 destination 4508 DI3dst It displays the Digital Input 3 destination 4509 DI4dst It displays the Digital Input 4 destination 4510 DI5 dst It displays the Digital Input 5 destination 4511 DI6dst It displays the Digital Input 6 destination 4512 DI7 dst It displays the Digital Input 7 destination 4513 dst It displays the Digital Input OX destination 4514 DI 1X dst It displays the Digital Input 1X destination 4515 DI 2X dst It displays the Digital Input 2X destination 4516 DI 3X dst It displays the Digital Input 3X destination 4517 DI 4X dst It displays the Digital Input 4X destination 4518 DI5X dst It displays the Digital Input 5X destination 4519 DI 6X dst It displays the Digital Input 6X destination 4520 DI 7X dst It displays the Digital Input 7X destination 4521 DI8X dst It displays the Digital Input 8X destination 4522 dst It displays the Digital Input 9X destination 4523 DI10X dst It displays the Digital Input 10X destination 4524 DI 11X dst It displays the Digital Input 11X destination 172 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 1 0 CONFIG Digital outputs The blocks of the digital outputs allow to turn an internal signal into a signal available on the terminal strip DO 0 src Exp dig out en Drive OK Disabled D
249. sses on slow side of gearbox ex pulley inertia etc Press o to exit from Weight menu Press 2 times Follow the points below to set the BU resistance parameters Startup config BU protection i Chapter 7 Commissioning 93 BU control Internal BU resistance 15 40 ohm 6 Press and edit the resistance value press to confirm Nore See section 4 9 2 for the minimum permissible value of the resistor For the thermal protection of the braking resistence a time reverse characteristic is defined This requires definition of resistor power in continous service BU res cont pwr Nore Refer to chapter 9 2 for details on BU protection BU res cont pwr 4 00 kw Press to edit the power value press to confirm Press to exit from Encoder Config menu de Startup config BU protection Bus Please wait to STARTUP Save config The prompt displays Save config Recommended For this operation the drive will take around 5 seconds Press to execute the procedure STARTUP Save config s R S STARTUP Nore Upon closing the STARTUP menu the drive exits from parametrization mode and becomes operational 94 Chapter 7 Commissioning ARTDrivel Instruction Manual U o Speed setting Speed profile WY ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Nore The drive cannot be enabled when STARTUP menu is open AVyL drive allows to set a Speed profile trough 8 diffe
250. t A from EXP board B from digital input 6 on RV33 4 S on multidrop connection the jumper must be ON only for the last drop of a serial line see table 4 5 2 for more details on encoder jumper setting see chapter 5 The devices are factory set accordingly When fitting a regulation card as a spare remember to set again the Caution encoders jumpers ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 41 4 3 2 Terminal Assignments on Regulation Section Table 4 3 2 1 Plug in Terminal Strip Assignments Strip XI Function max 0 1 Programmable configurable analog differential input Signal terminal 1 Analog input 1 0 2 Reference point terminal 2 10V nj 3 Programmable configurable analog differential input Signal terminal 3 0 25mA Analog input 2 4 Reference point terminal 4 20mA when Programmable configurable analog differential input Signal terminal 5 current loop 0 5 g 2 E input Analog input 3 P 0 6 Reference point terminal 6 0 7 10V Reference voltage 10V Reference point terminal 9 10V 10mA 8 10V Reference voltage 10V Reference point terminal 9 10V 10mA n 9 OV Internal OV and reference point for 10V D 12 Enable Inverter ENABLE active high Concurrently it can be used as a programmable Digital input 0 input Default
251. t AI1 0 20mA 4 20mA Analog inputs Std analog inps Analog input 1 An inp 1 src 5011 Al1 sgn src N A RWS 4000 List3 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It connects the selected signal to the selector of the multiplier input if the signal is 0 multiply by 1 or if the signal is 1 multiply by 1 The multiplier allows to invert Analog Input 1 signal refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual 5012 All alt sel src N A RWS 4000 List3 PIN V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It connects the selected signal to the selector of the alternative reference for An Inp 1 block refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual Analog inputs Std analog inps Analog input 1 An inp 1 cfg 5000 An inp 1 type N A RWS 0 0 2 DP V F S B 0 10V 10V Input connects a signal with a maximum voltage of 10V The change in 160 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode the motor rotation direction is obtained according to the signal polarity Input voltage gt 10V or gt 10V cause saturation of the count value 1 0 20mA 0 10V On the input it s possible to connect a max voltage of 10V or a 0 20mA current signal The signal must always have a positive sign through which if used as a reference it is possible to change the motor rotation direction via Al 1 sgn src 2 4 20mA On the input it is possible to connect a 4 20mA current sign
252. t It select the origin of the signal of Speed ref 2 Refer to signals List 10 of Pick List manual 7053 Speedref inv src N A RWS 4000 List3 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It connects the selected signal to the selector of the multiplier input if the signal is 0 multiply by 1 or if the signal is 1 multiply by 1 The multiplier allows to invert Speed reference signal refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual TRAVEL Speed setpoint Speed ref cfg 7040 Int speed ref 1 rpm RWS 0 Calc Calc PV V F S B Value of the Int speed ref 1 variable 7041 Int speed ref 2 rpm RWS 0 Calc Calc PV V F S B Value of the Int speed ref 2 variable TRAVEL Speed setpoint Speed ref mon 8022 Ramp out mon rpm R 0 00 000 000 PV V F S B Displaying of Ramp output signal 7045 Speed ref 1 mon rpm R 0 00 0 00 0 00 PP V F S B Displaying of the Speed ref 1 signal 150 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 7046 Speed ref 2 mon R 0 00 0 00 000 V F S B Displaying of the Speed ref 2 signal Ramp out enable g 2 Ramp out mon o o S z o gt L Speed setpoint Speed ref 1 src Zero Speed ref 1 mon LZ speed ref Int speed ref 1 0 rpm Speed ref 2 src Speed ref inv src null Ramp ref 2 mon Int speed ref 2 Int speed ref 2 1 Switch is closed
253. t ms RWS 30 0 1000 F S B Filter on the compensation 2625 Inertia comp mon Nn R 0 00 0 00 000 DV F S B It displays Inertia compensation torque contribution Inertia comp Acceleration _ J 1 S Tf Inertia comp SJ 1 S Tf Internal o External Off Y In Inertia comp mon Speed ref Speed gt J Int inertia Norm Speed Tf Inertia comp fit Nore Inertia comp mon signals is available in the pick lists of the analog outputs ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 147 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode TRAVEL DC braking DC current injection can help to stop the motor and ensure that lift car arrives exactly at floor level 1836 DCbrake cmd src N A RWS IPA7125 List3 V F S B IPA 7125 Lift DC Brake mon Default It allows to select the origin of the signal to command DC braking function normally if is controled by lift sequence refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual 1833 DCbrake delay sec RWS 01 0 01 30 PP V F S B Delay between the injection command and the injection of the current itself 1834 DCbrake duration sec RWS 1 0 01 30 PP V F S B Duration of the current injection 1835 DCbrake current RWS 100 0 100 PP V F S B Braking current as a percentage of Drive continuos current 1837 DCBrake state N A R 0 0 1 DV 0 non active
254. t allows to select the origin of Asynchronous Word 5 to be transmitted from Drive to DGFC card refer to signals List 30 of Pick List manual 4136 DGFC A W6src N A RWS 4146 List 30 PIN V F S B IPA 4146 Int DrvDGFC A W6 Default It allows to select the origin of Asynchronous Word 6 to be transmitted from Drive to DGFC card refer to signals List 30 of Pick List manual 4137 DGFC A W7src N A RWS IPA4147 List 30 PIN V F S B IPA 4147 Int DrvDGFC A W7 Default It allows to select the origin of Asynchronous Word 7 to be transmitted from Drive to DGFC card refer to signals List 30 of Pick List manual 4138 DGFC A W8src N A RWS 4148 List 30 PIN V F S B IPA 4148 Int DrvDGFC A W8 Default It allows to select the origin of Asynchronous Word 8 to be transmitted from Drive to DGFC card refer to signals List 30 of Pick List manual 4139 DGFC A W9src N A RWS 4149 List 30 V F S B IPA 4149 Int DrvDGFC A W9 Default It allows to select the origin of Asynchronous Word 9 to be transmitted from Drive to DGFC card refer to signals List 30 of Pick List manual APPL CARD CONFIG DGFC Drv gt DGFCA W cfg 4140 Int DrvDGFC A WO N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Internal Asynchronous Word 0 value configuration default connected to Drv DGFC A WOsrc 4141 Int DrvDGFC A W1 N A RWS 0 00 PV V F S B Internal Asynchronous Word 1 value configuration default connected to Drv DGFC A
255. t the power terminal strip AVy6750 0 8A 115V 60Hz 0 45A 230V 50Hz AVy7900 AVy71320 1 2A 9 115V 60Hz 0 65A 230V 50Hz AVy81600 1 65A 9 115V 60Hz 0 70A 9 230V 50Hz Figure 3 2 1 UL Type Fans Connections on AVy7900 AVy71100 and AVy71320 Sizes is 230VAC fans Drive Uc N3 AUTOTRAFO 13 Figure 3 2 2 UL Type Fans Connections on AVy6750 and AVy81600 Sizes Drive ue 2V3 e No 2 115VAC fans 32 Chapter 3 Installation Guidelines ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Figure 3 2 3 Example for External Connection Drive Drive 103 U3 i 243 i2v3 Only for AVy6750 and 230VAC AVy8 1600 drives V3 o Note An internal fuse 2 5A 250VAC slo blo for AVy7900 AVy71100 and AVy71320 sizes is provided On AVy6750 and AVy81600 sizes the fuse must be mounted externally ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 3 Installation Guidelines 33 Nore Nore 3 3 Installation Mounting Clearance The dimensions and weights specifed in this manual should be taken into consideration when the device is mounted The technical equipment required carriage or crane for large weights should be used Improper handling and the use of unsuitable tools may cause damage Figure 3 3 1 Max Angle of Inclination y AN The maximum angle of inclination is 30 The drives must be mounted in such a way that the free flow of air is ensured The clearance to the device must
256. t up to twice the value of the rated current if there is a ground fault at the output of the ARTDriveL drive Use 60 C 75 C copper conductor only 38 Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure ARTDriveL Instruction Manual Maximum Cable Sizes for control terminals Table 4 2 1 4 Maximum Permissible Cable Cross section on the Plug in Terminals of the Regulator Section Maximum Permissible Cable Cross Section Tightening 79 0 14 1 5 0 14 1 5 80 85 0 14 1 5 0 14 1 5 The use of a 75 x 2 5 x 0 4 mm 3 x 0 1 x 0 02 inch flat screwdriver is recommended Remove 6 5 mm 0 26 inch of the insulation at the cable ends Only one unprepared wire without ferrule should be connected to each terminal point AWG L 28 16 28 16 Maximum Cable Length Table 4 2 1 5 Maximum Control Cable Lengths Cable section Max Length m feet 27 88 62 203 93 305 125 410 150 492 avy3130 ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 4 Wiring Procedure 39 4 3 Reg 4 3 1 RV33 4 Regulation Card Switch amp Jumpers ulation Section f Qs x
257. table range among the signals of the Compare 1 block 6046 1 delay sec RWS 0 00 0 00 30 PP V F S B It allows to set a delay in seconds on the comparison transition in the Compare 1 block 6047 1 inversion RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted It allows to invert the Compare 1 block output signal CUSTOM FUNCTIONS Compare Compare 1 Compare 1 mon 6048 Compare 1 output N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B It allows to monitor the state of Compare 1 block output signal 0 FALSE 1 TRUE CUSTOM FUNCTIONS Compare Compare 2 CUSTOM FUNCTIONS Compare Compare 2 Compare 2 src 6064 Cmp2 inp 0 src N A RWS 6056 List6 V F S B IPA 6056 Cmp 2 inp 0 Default It allows to select the origin of the input signal 0 to be compared of the Compare 2 block refer to signals List 6 of Pick List manual 6065 Cmp2 inp 1 src N A RWS IPA6057 List6 V F S B IPA 6057 Cmp 2 inp 1 Default It allows to select the origin of the input signal 1 to be compared of the Compare 2 block refer to signals List 6 of Pick List manual 6066 Cmp2 inp 2 src N A RWS 6058 List6 V F S B IPA 6058 Cmp 2 inp 2 Default It allows to select the origin of the input signal 2 to be compared of the Compare 2 block refer to signals List 6 of Pick List manual 200 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode CU
258. tart command is not used zero speed in this configuration must be obtained through multi speed selection Change of direction must be accomplished by multi speed selection where some parameters are set to negative values or through Ramp ref inv sre parameter pointing to an digital input controlling direction In case that selection Seq start mode Mit spd out 0 is made sequence is started by selecting any multispeed value different from zero When output of multispeed selection is zero it is equivalent to a stop command ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 7 Commissioning 115 Enable Start fwd sre Start rev src Mit spd s 0 src Mit spd s 1 src PLC TO DRIVE SIGNALS Mit spd s 2 src Speed ref Magn current RUN cont mon UP cont mon DOWN cont mon Lift Enable mon BRAKE cont mon Lift Start mon DRIVE TO PLC SIGNALS Lift Landing mon Lift DC brake mon Start fwd rev commands are not required and for their management is valid what is written for selection Enable In general direction is controlled by Start fwd rew commands but if preferred only one of these commands can be used and delegate direction control to a simple multispeed selection Another possibility is to use digital input controlling parameter Ramp ref inv src Figure 8 1 Standard Commands Sequence Slow Down dist Spd 0 ref delay ete ir Brake open delay Cont open delay Brake clos
259. ter 10 seconds R 0 S 0 MONITOR R 0 S 0 STARTUP Nore Upon opening the STARTUP menu the drive enters in the parametrization mode STARTUP Startup config STARTUP Regulation mode Regulation mode V f control Select new mode V f control Select new mode Field oriented ie Press to confirm Regulation mode database selected Transfer param Yes gt Ent gt Press to transfer parameters from previous regulation mode to a newly selected regulation mode This operation is convenient only if some parameters have been set in previous regulation mode Otherwise press Esc to not transfer parameters Chapter 7 Commissioning 75 The drive will restart in the new regulation mode this will take around 5 seconds Restart Please wait then STARTUP Regulation mode Set Drive data Scroll and STARTUP Startup config The drive will show Startup config Enter setup mode then press The drive will restart to SETUP MODE menu wait few seconds messages sequence will follow Restart Please wait then SETUP MODE Drive data Press and set Drive data parameters SETUP MODE Drive data Mains voltage 400 V Press or to select AC input voltage from the following list 460 440 415 400 380 230V press to confirm If necessary it is also possible to change Ambient temperature and Switching frequency Ambient temp 40
260. tervention as 0 Only msg alarmq Actions Message 1 Ignore Actions none 2 Warning Actions Message Status 3 Disable drive Actions Message Commands for SM Status 4 Stop Actions Message Commands for SM Status 5 Fast stop Actions Message Commands for SM Status 6 Curr limstop Actions Message Commands for SM Status Actions meaning Message It means that the message has been sent to the Alarm List and to the Alarm log list Commands for SM State Machine commands A change in the drive state has been forced alarm intervention Status The active alarm signal is immediately set it is reset when the alarm is not more present and the state machine is not in an alarm condition Restart It allows to enable the automatic start after the alarm cause has been removed 0 Off 1 On Restart Time It allows to set a period of time within which the alarm state has to be removed in order to perform an automatic start Hold Off Time allows to set a period of time in which a specific alarm condition has to remain active it has to persist in order to be considered an alarm situation It is possible to set a millisecond period of time in which the Drive does not recognize the alarm state Therefore the alarm is recognized only if it persists for a period longer than the set Hold off time ALARM CONFIG Fault reset 9076 Fault reset src N A RWS 4027 List3 V F S B IPA 4027 DI 7 monit
261. th SinCos traces is resolver feedback using option cards EXP RES refer its manual for details XFR connector on EXP RES card Absolute encoder with Hiperface protocol XE connector sinusoidal incremental encoder with A A B B C C traces absolute position traces are not necessary because phasing is performed automatically at every start digital incremental encoder with A A B B C C traces absolute position traces are not necessary because phasing is performed automatically at every start Chapter 7 Commissioning 107 N Braking unit setting BU protection VY Caution For each encoder feedback set the correct jumpers configuration on the regulation card RV33 Std enc type SinusoidalSinCos Std enc pulses 1024 ppr Press to edit the number according to encoder data press to confirm Nore Itis possible to use only encoder having pulses per revolution equal to a multiple of 2 Example 512 ppr 1024 ppr 2048 ppr etc Press to exit from Encoder Config menu Press o 2 times Follow the points below to set the BU resistance parameters Startup config BU protection BU control Internal BU resistance 15 40 ohm Press and edit the resistance value press to confirm Nore See section 4 9 2 for the minimum permissible value of the resistor For the thermal protection of the braking resistence a time reverse characteristic is defined This require
262. the Calc Inertia parameter or specifying parameters in Weights menu 134 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 2610 Calc Inertia RWZ D Size 0 0 FK F S B Inertia of the load When parameters in Weights menu have been set the result of system inertia referred to the motor shaft is set in this parameter 2049 Bandwidth rad s RWZ 50 1 400 FK F S B Speed regulator bandwidth Higher bandwidth value makes motor respond faster and overall result is more stiff control STARTUP Startup config V f config 3420 V fvoltage V RWZ Calc V Base voltage for the V f mode This parameter is set according to motor nominal voltage but can be changed to modify V f characteristic 3430 V ffrequency Hz RWZ Motr 5 Calc V Base frequency for the V f mode This parameter is set according to motor nominal frequency but can be changed to modify V f characteristic V V f voltage frequency STARTUP Startup config Motor protection I2t function is similar to the protection of the motor by the thermal relay states the 12t typical behavior The integrator state is given by Mot OL accum it gives the percentage state of the Rms current integration 100 121 alarm level Mot OL trip signal is available in the pick list selections It states that the trip condition of 12t has been reached and overload
263. the origin of Contact feedback signal refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 185 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 9068 CNT activity N A RWS 3 1 6 DP 1 Ignore 2 Warning 3 Disable drive 4 Stop 5 Fast stop 6 Curr limstp Contact feedback alarm activity 7135 hold off ms RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V F S B Contact feedback hold off RUN cont mon UU L AER No Alarm No Alarm CNT feedback src No Alarm ALARM CONFIG Brake feedback It trips when the brake feedback signal is not detected 7142 feedback src N A RWS IPA7123 List3 PIN V F S B IPA 7123 BRAKE cont mon Default It allows to select the origin of Brake feedback signal refer to signals List 3 of Pick List manual 9086 activity N A RWS 3 1 6 DP V F S B 1 Ignore 2 Warning 3 Disable drive 4 Stop 5 Fast stop 6 Curr limstp Brake feedback alarm activity 7136 hold off ms RWS 1000 0 30000 PP V F S B Brake feedback hold off BRAKE cont mon E No Alarm Alarm Brake fbk fail BRK feedback src j No Alarm off off Nore During brake active state eventual alarms are latched and are reported only in brake idle state see IPA 7145 7145 RUN hold off N A 1 0 1 DP V F S B Brake feedback holdoff configuration 0 Off brake feedback trip is reported immediately 1 On eventual brake feedba
264. ting lower value results in higher continuous output current After changing this parameter selftune data are initialized to default self tuning must be repeated 0 2 kHz 1 4 kHz 2 8 kHz 3 16 kHz 4 12 kHz 1880 ref fbk res RW 1 0 5 DK V F S B Resolution of the speed references referred to the maximum process speed 1885 Full scale speed parameter After changing this parameter selftune data are initialized to default self tuning must be repeated 0 0 125 rpm gt 2048 rpm maximum process speed 1 0 250 rpm gt 4096 rpm maximum process speed 2 0 500 rpm gt 8192 rpm maximum process speed 3 1 000 rpm gt 16384 rpm maximum process speed 4 0 03125 rpm gt 512 rpm maximum process speed SETUP MODE Motor data for AVy AC series 670 Rated voltage V RW D Size FK V F S B Motor rated voltage 680 Rated frequency Hz RW D Size Calc Calc V F S Motor rated frequency 690 Rated current A RW D Size FK V F S B Motor rated current 126 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode Nore value should be not less then approx 0 3 times the drive rated current output current Class 1 400V on the motor nameplate 700 Rated speed rpm RW D Size Calc Calc V F S B Motor full load speed at the rated frequency If Slip is available on the motor nameplate data set Rated sp
265. tion Card sss Table 4 3 1 2 Jumpers and dip switches on Regulation Card RV33 4 3 2 Terminal Assignments on Regulation Section sse Table 4 3 2 1 Plug in Terminal Strip Assignments sss 4 4 Potentials of the Control Section Figure 4 4 1 A Potentials of the control section Digital 1 0 NPN connection Figure 4 4 1 B Potentials of the control section Digital 1 0 PNP connection is LRPdmapE 45 Table 4 5 1 Recommended Cable Section and Length for the Connection of Encoders Table 4 5 2 Encoders Setting via S11 S23 Jumpers Table 4 5 3 Encoders Connections ate ceti rata Table 4 5 4 Assignment of the High Density XE Connector for a Sinusoidal or a Digital Encoder 4 5 1 XFR Connector Assignments on optional EXP RES Expansion Board for Resolver z 4 9 2 Encoder SImulation tee nintendo Ao Comecon Diagrams etn TES Figure 4 6 1 Standard Connection Diagram se 4 6 1 Expansion Card Connection rti rere rire ta thm roter riae Figure 4 6 2 Common Output Contactors Management sss tetti 52 Figure 4 6 3 Separate Output Contactors Management ssh 53 4 1 Citcult Protection icd eterna cc e c ROT ie tennis 4 7 1 External Fuses for the Power Section m
266. tor p 171 DI 5X inversion p 170 DI 5X monitor p 171 DI 6X inversion p 170 DI 6X monitor p 171 DI 7X inversion p 171 DI 7X monitor p 171 DI 8X inversion p 171 DI 8X monitor p 171 DI 9X inversion p 171 DI 9X monitor p 171 DI 0 Enable dst p 172 DI 0 Enable mon p 170 DI OX dst p 172 DI 1 dst p 172 DI 1 inversion p 169 DI 1 monitor p 170 DI 10X dst p 172 DI 10X inversion p 171 DI 10X monitor p 171 DI 11X dst p 172 DI 11X inversion p 171 DI 11X monitor p 171 DI 1X dst p 172 DI 2 dst p 172 DI 2 inversion p 169 DI 2 monitor p 170 DI 2X dst p 172 DI 3 dst p 172 DI 3 inversion p 169 DI 3 monitor p 170 DI 3X dst p 172 DI 4 dst p 172 DI 4 inversion p 169 DI 4 monitor p 170 DI 4X dst p 172 DI 5 dst p 172 DI 5 inversion p 169 DI 5 monitor p 170 DI 5X dst p 172 DI 6 dst p 172 DI 6 inversion p 169 DI 6 monitor p 170 DI 6X dst p 172 DI 7 dst p 172 DI 7 inversion p 170 DI 7 monitor p 170 DI 7654321E p 122 170 DI 7X dst p 172 DI 8X dst p 172 DI 9X dst p 172 Dig Enable src p 159 Dig pad 0 p 202 Dig pad 1 p 202 Dig pad 10 p 203 Dig pad 11 p 203 Dig pad 12 p 203 Dig pad 13 p 203 Dig pad 14 p 203 Dig pad 15 p 203 Dig pad 2 p 202 Dig pad 3 p 202 Dig pad 4 p 202 Dig pad 5 p 202 Dig pad 6 p 202 Dig pad 7 p 202 Dig pad 8 p 202 Dig pad 9 p 202 Chapter 12 Parameters Index 221 Dig StrStp src p 159 Digital inputs p 169 Digital outputs p 173 DIX BA9876543210 p 122 171 DO p 174
267. trolled three phase motor feeds energy back to the DC link circuit via the drive This creates an increase in the intermediate circuit voltage Braking units BU are therefore used in order to prevent the DC voltage rising to an impermissible value When used these activate a braking resistor that is connected in parallel to the capacitors of the intermediate circuit The feedback energy is converted to heat via the braking resistor Rpp thus providing very short deceleration times and restricted four quadrant operation Figure 4 9 1 Operation with Braking Unit Principle E S BU Drive sizes 1007 up to 3150 have as standard configuration an internal braking unit Drive sizes 4220 up to 5550 can have an optional internal braking unit see section 2 1 2 Inverter type designation factory mounted All the standard AVy drive can be equipped with an external braking unit BU 32 or BUy connected to the terminals C and D Note When the internal braking unit is present or when circuit terminals C and D are connected to external devices the AC Input must be protected with superfast semiconductor fuses Observe the mounting instruction concerned For braking resistor connection terminals BR1 and C a twisted cable has to be used In case the braking resistor is supplied with thermal protection klixon it may be connected to the External fault drive input The braking resistors can be subject to unforeseen overloa
268. uction Manual Chapter 12 Parameters Index 219 990 p 127 A Abort p 137 ACF activity p 187 Actual setup p 125 Advanced Status p 123 Al 1 alt sel src p 160 Al 1 alt value p 161 Al 1 gain tune p 161 Al 1 offs tune p 161 Al 1 sgn src p 160 Al 1X gain tune p 164 Al 1X offs tune p 164 Al 1X sgn src p 163 Al 2 alt sel src p 162 Al 2 alt value p 162 Al 2 gain tune p 162 Al 2 offs tune p 162 Al2 sgn src p 161 Al 2X gain tune p 164 Al 2X offs tune p 164 Al 2X sgn src p 164 Al 3 alt sel src p 162 AI 3 alt value p 163 Al gain tune p 163 Al 3 offs tune p 163 Al 3 sgn src p 162 ALARM CONFIG p 182 Alarm log p 125 Alarm log clear p 125 Alarm status p 189 Alm status cfg p 189 Alm status mon p 189 Alm W1 S1 p 189 Alm W1 S2 p 189 Alm W2 S1 p 189 Alm W2 S2 p 190 Alm W3 S1 p 189 Alm W3 S2 p 190 Ambient temp p 126 Aninp 1 thr p 161 An inp 1 cfg p 160 An inp 1 dst p 165 An inp 1 filter p 161 An inp 1 gain p 161 An inp 1 hi lim p 161 An inp 1 low lim p 161 An inp 1 mon p 161 An inp 1 offset p 161 An inp 1 output p 161 An inp 1 scale p 161 An inp 1 src p 160 An inp 1 thr p 161 An inp 1 type p 160 An inp 1X thr p 164 An inp 1X cfg p 163 An inp 1X dst p 165 An inp 1X gain p 164 An inp 1X hi lim p 164 An inp 1X lo lim p 164 An inp 1X mon p 164 An inp 1X offset p 164 An inp 1X output p 164 An inp 1X scale p 164 An inp 1X src p 163 An inp 1X thr p 164 An inp 1X type p 163 An inp 2 lt thr p 162 An inp 2 cfg p 1
269. ues 2039 base value AN RWS 0 00 0 00 F S B Basic value of the proportional gain of voltage loop 2041 base value AN s RWS Calc 0 00 0 00 F S B Basic value of the integral gain of voltage loop REGULATION PARAM Torque config Inuse Tcurr lim Prop filter T Filter 5 gt TR PET Inuse Tcurr lim Speed reg out Tcurr ref X Torque ref of 0 Inertia comp Torque ref 2 mon T lim Torque ref 2 src 1 T lim mot gen 9 T lim sym var 9 Tcurr lim sel lim pos var 9 T lim neg var 9 REGULATION PARAM Torque config Torque setpoint T setpoint src 2441 Torque ref 2 src N A RWS 9433 List15 F S B IPA 9433 Pre torque out Default It allows to select the origin of the signal for torque reference refer to signals List 15 of Pick List manual REGULATION PARAM Torque config Torque setpoint T setpoint cfg 2440 Int torque ref 2 Nm RWS 0 00 Calc PV F S B It allows to set an alternative reference to connect to Torque ref 2 src REGULATION PARAM Torque config Torque setpoint T setpoint mon 2442 Torque ref 2 mon Nm R 0 00 0 00 000 F S B Torque ref 2 variable displaying 2450 Torque ref Nm R 0 00 000 000 PV F S B Overall Torque ref variable displaying REGULATION PARAM Torque config Torque curr lim Trq curr lim src 1195 curr
270. unction the status Registers are not available via keypad and are to be used for the configuration and the data reading These are L index register 1 9556 H index register 1 9555 In the next table are showed the registers values PAR epel me E aa It indicates which encoder is used for index storing 0 register data are referred to the Std Encoder input 1 register data are referred to the Exp Encoder input Actual Qualifier input value digital input 7 0 qualifier input level is low 1 qualifier input level is high Status of the acquisition function as 0 OFF STATNLT 1 Once storing is not executed yet 2 Once storing is already executed 3 Continuous sss oas commer ahei ony vata anen stAT uareeors Value is only valid when STANLT is equal to 2 or 3 indexstorpar 1936 Motor pp sens pp N A RW Calc Calc 32 PP B Ratio between motor pole pairs and feedback sensor pole pairs typically used for resolver STARTUP Startup config SpdReg gain calc 2048 Calc method N A RWZ 0 0 1 DK F S B With Calc method two gain calculation methods can be selected 0 Variable bandw speed regulation bandwidth is internally selected according to the principle that bandwidth is decreased as inertia is increased 1 Fixed bandw speed regulation bandwidth is specified by parameter Bandwidth It allows to perform the speed regulator gain calculation Inertia must be entered throught
271. urrent 128 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 2880 Measured Im Max A RW Calc 0 00 0 00 V F S Value of the maximum magnetizing current 2890 Measured Flux Nom Wb RW Calc 0 00 0 00 V F S Value of the rated Flux 2900 Measured Flux Max Wb RW Calc 0 00 0 00 V F S Value of the maximumFlux STARTUP Startup config Load setup Load setup Load setup command is required to load all SETUP MODE settings into the regulation mode selected Entering this parameter on the display will appear Load setup Yes gt Ent No Esc Press Enter to load the SETUP MODE settings Press Escape if you do not want to load the SETUP MODE settings Nore operation is required for every Regulation mode V S and B It is also required for every new setting made in the SETUP MODE If any changes settings in Motor data and Drive data are detected Load setup command is presented automatically to the user respond Yes to load data STARTUP Startup config Mechanical data 1015 Travel units sel N A RWZ 0 0 1 DK V F S B 0 Revolutions 1 Millimeters It determines the units of TRAVEL Speed profile and TRAVEL Ramp profile menu parameters Revolutions rpm rpm s and rpm s Millimeters mm s mm s and mm s 1002 Gearbox ratio N A RWZ 35 1 100 FK V F S B Ratio between motor shaft speed and pulle
272. utput 2X count value aimed at obtaining 10V Value must be higher than zero 6026 An out 2X lo lim cnt RWS 16384 32768 0 PP V F S B Analog output 2X count value aimed at obtaining 10V Value must be higher than zero Analog outputs Exp analog outs Analog output 2X An out 2X mon 6028 An out 2X mon cnt R 0 00 32768 32676 PP V F S B Analog output 2X count value displaying Analog outputs Exp analog outs Analog output 3X An out 3X src 4092 An out 3X src N A RWS 4000 List 2 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the selected signal to the Analog output 3X refer to signals List 2 of Pick List manual Analog outputs Exp analog outs Analog output 3X An out 3X cfg 6034 An out 3X type N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 0 20 mA 1 4 20 mA It allows to select the Analog output 3X type EXP D20A6 optional card is required ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 167 IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 6032 An out scale N A RWS 1 10 10 PP V F S B Scale or multiplicative factor of Analog output 3X 6030 An out 3X hi lim cnt RWS 16383 0 32767 PP V F S B Analog output count value aimed at obtaining 10V Value must be higher than zero 6031 An out 3X lo lim cn RWS 16384 32768 0 PP V F S B Analog output 3X count value aimed at obtaining 10V Value must be higher than zero Analog outputs Exp analog outs Analog output
273. version N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4032 DI 2X inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4033 DI inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4034 DI 4X inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4035 DI 5X inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4036 DI 6X inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 170 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode 4037 DI 7X inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4038 DI 8X inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4039 9X inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4040 DI 10X inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 4041 DI11X inversion N A RWS 0 0 1 DP V F S B 0 Not inverted 1 Inverted 1 0 CONFIG Digital inputs Exp digital inps Exp dig inp mon 4045 DI OX monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input OX terminal displaying 4046 DI 1X monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 1X terminal displaying 4047 DI 2X monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 2X terminal displaying 4048 DI 3X monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 3X terminal displaying 4049 DI 4X monitor N A R 0 0 1 DV V F S B Digital Input 4X terminal displ
274. y Drive ok Ref is zero Speed is zero by communicating on a single word The Bits gt Wordn Block has 16 inputs where each of them can be connected to a signal the output of the Word compn Block contains the packed input bits Two Bits gt Word blocks are available WORD_0 WORD_1 WO comp out W1 comp out 1 0 CONFIG Bits gt Word Bits gt Word0 src 2100 WordO BO src N A RWS 4000 Listi V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 0 signal selected to the Word 0 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 2101 WordO B1 src N A RWS 4000 Listi V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 1 signal selected to the Word 0 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 2102 Word0 B2 src N A RWS 4000 List1 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 2 signal selected to the Word 0 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 2103 WordO src N A RWS 4000 List1 PIN V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 3 signal selected to the Word 0 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 2104 WordO src N A RWS 4000 Listi V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Default It allows to connect the Bit 4 signal selected to the Word 0 refer to signals List 1 of Pick List manual 2105 WordO B5 src N A RWS 4000 List1 V F S B IPA 4000 NULL Def
275. y all other menus SAVE PARAMETERS command Any changes made in STARTUP menu require Save Config command which saves all entire regulation mode selected It is recommended every time the user made any changes into STARTUP menu SAVE PARAMETERS command saves all the changes made out of STARTUP menu only When on the keypad display appears blinking message Use Save Config use Save Config command 204 Chapter 9 Parameter ARTDrivel Instruction Manual IPA Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode SERVICE menu allows the setting of the password to enable Level 1 drive menus 12345 To have the access of Level 1 drive menus edit 12345 password into Insert Password parameter and confirm it using Enter button NOTE Level 1 password must be edit every recycle drive supply SERVICE menu allows also the setting of the password to enable Level 2 drive menu ask Level 2 password to the technical support To have the access of Level 2 drive menus 1_ edit 12345 password into Insert Password parameter and confirm it using Enter button 2_ check the password through Check password parameter using Enter button ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 205 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting When the red Alarm LED blinks it is indicating one or more alarm conditions Figure 10 1 Led Status and Keypad ads Eum SET Em 17 Alarm led is lighted
276. y speed Eventual roping ratio must also be included 1003 Pulley diameter mm RWZ 500 100 2000 FK V F S B Diameter of the pulley 1885 Full scale speed rpm RW 1500 Calc PV V F S B It defines the 100 of the application speed referenced The absolute speed handling range is 200 Full scale speed For lift application set this parameter to maximum allowed motor speed typically rated speed of the motor This parameter will also set the limit on all multispeed values IPA 7060 7067 STARTUP Startup config Weights 1004 Car weight kg RWZ 0 00 0 00 000 V F S B Weight of the Lift car 1005 Counter weight kg RWZ 0 00 0 00 0 00 V F S B Weight of the counter mass to achieve balanced system 1006 Load weight kg RWZ 0 00 0 00 000 FK V F S B Maximum weight of Lift load total persons weight 1007 Rope weight kg RWZ 0 00 0 00 000 V F S B Total weight of Rope 1011 Motor inertia RWZ 0 000 0 000 0 000 V F S B Inertia of the motor refer to motor manufacturer if it is not available leave to default ARTDrivel Instruction Manual Chapter 9 Parameter 129 IPA 1012 Description Unit Access Default Min Max Format Reg Mode Gearbox inertia RWZ 0 000 0 000 0 000 V F S B Inertia of the gearbox refer to manufacturer if it is not available leave to default Can be set here the inertia of all mechanical parts at slow side of gearbox ex pulley etc Pulley diam

Gefran SIEI AVyL Manual - International Lift Equipment

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents